Operation Manual
TMC470
Marking System Controller
®
(for TeleScribe Markers)
This document contains operating instructions for the Telesis® TMC470
Controller and its marking system software. This document should be
used along with the marker-specific Operation Supplement that
provides information on the marking system hardware and its usage.
Document No. 82350Telesis Technologies, Inc.
28181 River Drive
P.O. Box 1000
Circleville, Ohio 43113
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Foreword
Telesis Technologies, Inc. (hereinafter referred to as Telesis) reserves the right to change the information and
specifications contained in this document without prior notice. The reader should consult Telesis to determine whether
such changes have been made.
In no event shall Telesis be liable for any incidental, indirect, special, or consequential damages whatsoever, including but
not limited to lost profits, arising out of, or relating to this document or the information it contains, even if Telesis has
been advised, has knowledge, or should have knowledge of the possibility of such damages.
Telesis expressly warrants the equipment it manufactures as set forth in the Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale.
Telesis makes no other warranties, expressed or implied, including and without limitation, warranties as to
merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose.
The information contained in this document is confidential and is proprietary to Telesis or its licensors.
Trademarks
Telesis, TeleScribe, and PS-OCR are registered trademarks of Telesis Technologies, Inc.
DataWrite is a registered trademark of Data Safe-Media Ltd.
Lexar is a registered trademark of Lexar Media, Inc.
PEAK is a registered trademark of PEAKHARDWARE International Co., Ltd.
PNY is a registered trademark of PNY Technologies, Inc.
OCZ is a registered trademark of OCZ Technology Group.
SONY is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation.
© 2010 – 2016 Telesis Technologies, Incorporated – All Rights Reserved
82350-
i
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Table of Contents
SUBJECT
PAGE
FOREWORD
I
TRADEMARKS
I
LICENSE AGREEMENT FOR TELESIS SOFTWARE
VII
TELESIS CUSTOMER SUPPORT
VIII
SAFETY SUMMARY
IX
CHAPTER 1 CONTROLLER OPERATION
1
1.1
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2
Using the Marking System ............................................................................................................... 1
1.3
Using the Controller ......................................................................................................................... 1
1.3.1
Power On / Software Startup ................................................................................................. 2
1.3.2
Modes of Operation .............................................................................................................. 2
1.3.3
Navigation Keys................................................................................................................... 3
1.3.4
Function Keys...................................................................................................................... 4
1.3.5
Marker Operation Keys ......................................................................................................... 5
1.3.6
Edit Keys ............................................................................................................................ 6
1.3.7
Special Keys ....................................................................................................................... 7
Diacritics ....................................................................................................................... 7
Control Characters.......................................................................................................... 7
1.4
Open a Pattern File .......................................................................................................................... 8
1.5
Place Machine Online ....................................................................................................................... 9
1.6
Park the Machine ........................................................................................................................... 10
1.7
Pre-Position the Machine ............................................................................................................... 11
1.8
Enter Data Into Patterns................................................................................................................ 12
1.8.1
Enter User Text ................................................................................................................. 12
1.8.2
Enter Query Text ............................................................................................................... 13
1.9
Simulate Printing (Dryrun) ............................................................................................................ 14
1.10
Print Patterns .............................................................................................................................. 14
1.11
Stop the Print Cycle ..................................................................................................................... 14
1.12
Jog the Machine ........................................................................................................................... 15
1.13
Display System Information ........................................................................................................ 16
ii
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.14
Display Print Cycle Time .............................................................................................................. 16
CHAPTER 2 PATTERN DESIGN & MANAGEMENT
1
2.1
Overview ......................................................................................................................................... 1
2.2
Design Considerations ..................................................................................................................... 1
2.2.1
Marking Window Size ........................................................................................................... 2
2.2.2
Placement of Objects ........................................................................................................... 2
2.2.3
Character Dimensions .......................................................................................................... 4
2.2.4
Font Selection ..................................................................................................................... 4
2.2.5
Printing Order ..................................................................................................................... 5
2.2.6 Codes and Real-time Data ..................................................................................................... 6
Operator-Supplied Text ................................................................................................... 7
Serial Numbers .............................................................................................................. 7
Time and Date Insertion ................................................................................................. 8
Coded Information ......................................................................................................... 8
Error Checking ............................................................................................................... 8
2.3
Access Designer Mode ..................................................................................................................... 9
2.4
Create New Patterns ..................................................................................................................... 10
2.4.1
Using the Pattern Wizard .................................................................................................... 10
2.4.2
Using the Pattern Editor ..................................................................................................... 12
2.5
Save/Name/Copy Patterns............................................................................................................ 13
2.6
Define Objects in Patterns ............................................................................................................. 14
2.6.1
Text ................................................................................................................................. 14
ArcText (Radius Method) .............................................................................................................. 20
ArcText 3P (3-point Method) ......................................................................................................... 26
Block Objects .............................................................................................................................. 32
2.6.2
Arc (Radius Method) .......................................................................................................... 35
2.6.3
Arc 3P (3-point Method) ..................................................................................................... 38
2.6.6
Line (Start Method) ........................................................................................................... 40
2.6.7
Line 2P (Start/End Method) ................................................................................................ 43
2.6.8
Box.................................................................................................................................. 45
2.6.9
Circle ............................................................................................................................... 48
2.6.10
Ellipse (Radius Method) .................................................................................................... 50
2.6.11
Ellipse 3P (3-point Method) ............................................................................................... 54
2.6.13
GoTo Command............................................................................................................... 58
2.6.14
Pause Command .............................................................................................................. 60
2.6.15
Input Command .............................................................................................................. 62
2.6.16
Output Command ............................................................................................................ 66
2.6.17
Serial Command .............................................................................................................. 67
2.6.18
Machine Command .......................................................................................................... 70
2.7
Test Patterns ................................................................................................................................. 72
2.8
Edit Patterns ................................................................................................................................. 73
2.8.1
Change Pattern Parameters ................................................................................................ 73
82350-
iii
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.8.2
2.9
Change Field Parameters .................................................................................................... 73
2.8.3
Copy Fields ....................................................................................................................... 73
2.8.4
Delete Fields ..................................................................................................................... 74
2.8.5
Move Fields (Change Print Order) ....................................................................................... 75
2.8.6
Adjusting the Pattern Anchor............................................................................................... 76
Configure Pattern Properties ......................................................................................................... 78
2.10
2.11
2.9.1
Pattern Serial Number ........................................................................................................ 78
2.9.2
Pattern Park Position .......................................................................................................... 81
2.9.3
Default Text Settings ......................................................................................................... 82
2.9.4
Pattern Instructions ........................................................................................................... 84
2.9.5
X/Y-axis Speed Parameters ................................................................................................. 85
Remote Pattern Selection ............................................................................................................ 87
2.10.1
Reserved Pattern Names ................................................................................................... 87
2.10.2
Parameter Configuration ................................................................................................... 87
Manage the Controller Library ..................................................................................................... 88
2.11.1
View Library Files ............................................................................................................. 88
2.11.2
Delete Library Files .......................................................................................................... 89
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION & MANAGEMENT
3.1
Access System Parameters .............................................................................................................. 2
3.2
System Passwords ........................................................................................................................... 3
3.3
Marker Properties ............................................................................................................................ 4
3.4
Query Text Properties ...................................................................................................................... 7
3.5
Date Code Properties ....................................................................................................................... 8
3.6
Shift Code Properties ..................................................................................................................... 10
3.7
Omni Serial Number Properties ..................................................................................................... 12
3.8
Startup Properties ......................................................................................................................... 15
3.9
Host Communication Properties .................................................................................................... 19
iv
3.9.1
Primary Communication Parameters ..................................................................................... 19
3.9.2
Programmable Protocol Parameters...................................................................................... 20
3.9.3
Programmable Protocol Examples ........................................................................................ 23
Data Defined By Terminator........................................................................................... 23
Data Defined By Length ................................................................................................ 24
Message Type Defined By Host....................................................................................... 25
3.9.4
Extended Protocol Parameters ............................................................................................. 27
3.9.5
Extended Protocol Examples .............................................................................................. 29
Message Format ........................................................................................................... 29
Response Format ......................................................................................................... 29
Message Types............................................................................................................. 30
Block Check Code ......................................................................................................... 34
82350-
1
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.10
Serial2 Communication Properties .............................................................................................. 35
3.11
Ethernet Communication Properties ............................................................................................ 38
3.12
Clock and Calendar Properties ..................................................................................................... 41
3.13
Units of Measure ......................................................................................................................... 42
3.14
Enable / Disable Impact Pin ........................................................................................................ 43
3.15
Reset System Parameters............................................................................................................ 44
3.16
Using the USB Port ...................................................................................................................... 45
3.17
3.16.1
File/Directory Operations .................................................................................................. 46
Access Files on USB Drive ............................................................................................. 46
Access Files in Controller ............................................................................................... 46
Choose Files to be Displayed ......................................................................................... 47
Change Directory on USB Drive ..................................................................................... 47
Display File Size ........................................................................................................... 47
Display File Timestamp ................................................................................................. 47
Create a Directory on USB Drive .................................................................................... 47
Delete a Single File ...................................................................................................... 48
Delete Multiple Files ..................................................................................................... 48
Delete a Directory on USB Drive .................................................................................... 48
3.16.2
Backup Files .................................................................................................................... 49
Backup a Single File ..................................................................................................... 49
Backup Multiple Files .................................................................................................... 50
3.16.3
Restore Files ................................................................................................................... 51
Restore a Single File ..................................................................................................... 51
Restore Multiple Files .................................................................................................... 52
3.16.4
Upgrade Controller Firmware............................................................................................. 53
Maintenance Tasks ...................................................................................................................... 55
3.17.1
Test Output Signals ......................................................................................................... 55
3.17.2
Test Input Signals............................................................................................................ 56
3.17.3
Test Solenoids ................................................................................................................. 58
3.17.4
Test Machine Movement ................................................................................................... 59
3.17.5
Verify Marker Position ...................................................................................................... 60
3.17.6
Monitor Communications .................................................................................................. 62
CHAPTER 4 SYSTEM MESSAGES
1
Delete Parameter(s) Is Not Allowed ................................................................................................. 1
Denied On an Empty Pattern! .......................................................................................................... 1
Denied! Marker Is Offline! .............................................................................................................. 1
Device Is Not Formatted ................................................................................................................. 1
Device Is Not Mounted ................................................................................................................... 1
Error: 7 Bits / No Parity Is Not Supported! ....................................................................................... 1
Error: Alpha SN Range Warning! (A-Z) ............................................................................................ 1
Error: An Edit Field Needs Selected ................................................................................................. 1
Error: Cannot Copy an Empty Field ................................................................................................. 1
Error: Cannot Cut an Empty Field ................................................................................................... 1
Error: Cannot Save, Flash Disk Is Full ............................................................................................. 2
82350-
v
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Error: ChDir Failed ........................................................................................................................ 2
Error: Copy Failed ......................................................................................................................... 2
Error: Copying Unknown Parameter File ........................................................................................... 2
Error: Delete Failed ....................................................................................................................... 2
Error: in Deleting the Pattern! ........................................................................................................ 2
Error: in Loading Pattern! .............................................................................................................. 2
Error: in Saving Pattern! ................................................................................................................ 2
Error: Invalid Source ..................................................................................................................... 2
Error: MkDir Failed ........................................................................................................................ 2
Error: Over Temperature Fault Detected .......................................................................................... 2
Error: Paste Buffer Is Empty........................................................................................................... 2
Error: Serial Number Range Warning! .............................................................................................. 3
Error: UNTITLED Is a Reserved Name! ............................................................................................. 3
Field (nn) - User Font Error! ............................................................................................................ 3
F-Ram Error ... Initializing F-Ram..................................................................................................... 3
Home Limit Error in X-axis .............................................................................................................. 3
Home Limit Error in Y-axis .............................................................................................................. 3
I2C Error with F-Ram ..................................................................................................................... 3
I2C Error with RT Clock .................................................................................................................. 3
I2C Interface Failed to Initialize! ...................................................................................................... 3
I2C RT Clock Low Battery Warning! .................................................................................................. 3
Marker Aborted!............................................................................................................................. 3
Marker Aborted! Over Temperature Fault ......................................................................................... 4
No Pattern Loaded! Pre-position What? ............................................................................................ 4
Memory Allocation Error.................................................................................................................. 4
Parameter Error! Defaults Loaded! .................................................................................................. 4
Password Error! **Access Denied** ................................................................................................ 4
Pattern Pixel Range Error! Field (nn) ............................................................................................... 4
Serial Tool is Not Enabled ............................................................................................................... 4
Timeout... Cannot Find Home Position! ............................................................................................. 4
Variable Text Field Not Found .......................................................................................................... 4
APPENDIX A STANDARD TELESIS FONTS
1
SIMPLEX Font Character Set .................................................................................................................... 1
PS-OCR Font Character Set ...................................................................................................................... 1
COMPLEX Font Character Set ................................................................................................................... 2
DIN Font Character Set ........................................................................................................................... 3
APPENDIX B ASCII CHARACTER CROSS REFERENCE
1
Standard ASCII Characters ...................................................................................................................... 1
Extended ASCII Characters ..................................................................................................................... 2
INDEX
vi
3
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
License Agreement for Telesis Software
THE SUBJECT PROGRAMS ARE LICENSED BY TELESIS TECHNOLOGIES, INC. TO ENDUSERS FOR THEIR USE ONLY ON THE TERMS BELOW. ACCEPTING AND USING THESE
PROGRAMS INDICATES YOUR ACCEPTANCE OF THESE TERMS.
THIS IS A LEGAL
AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU, THE END USER, AND TELESIS TECHNOLOGIES, INC.
1)
GRANT OF LICENSE. Telesis Technologies, Inc. (Telesis) agrees to grant to you a non-exclusive license to use the
Telesis software/firmware program (the program) subject to the terms and conditions of this license agreement.
2)
DEFINITION OF TERMS. The term software refers to a computer program stored on electronic media that must be
loaded into computer memory to be executed.
The term firmware refers to a computer program stored in
semiconductor memory (ROM, PROM, EPROM, EEPROM, NVRAM, etc.) that is an integral part of the computer memory.
Together, these forms of computer programs are referred to as the program.
3)
COPYRIGHT. The program(s) and documentation is owned by Telesis and is protected by United States copyright laws
and international treaty provisions. The program(s) contain trade secrets and proprietary property of Telesis. You may
make one copy of the program(s) solely for backup or archival purposes provided that the copy clearly displays the
Telesis copyright notice. Additional copies may be made when authorized to do so in writing by Telesis. In addition to
any other right of Telesis, Telesis has the right to terminate this license if the terms of the license are violated.
4)
RESTRICTION ON USE AND TRANSFER. The single-processor version(s) of the program(s) and documentation are to be
used on one computer or embedded system at any one time. The multi-processor version(s) of the program(s) and
documentation may be used over a network provided that the number of computers accessing the network
simultaneously shall not exceed the number authorized by Telesis or for which you paid the corresponding multiprocessor fee. You may not distribute the programs or documentation to a third party. You may transfer the license
and complete package (retaining nothing) if the transferee agrees to the terms of this License Agreement. Neither the
program(s) nor the documentation may be changed or translated without express written permission of Telesis. You
may not reverse engineer, decompile or disassemble the program(s).
5)
WARRANTY for the subject program(s) is covered under the Telesis Standard Terms and Conditions of Sale.
6)
TERM. The license is effective until terminated. It will be terminated if you fail to comply with any term or condition of
this License Agreement. You may terminate this License Agreement at any time. In the event of termination, you
agree to destroy the program(s) and documentation together with all copies and related material.
7)
YOUR USE OF THIS PROGRAM(S) acknowledges that you have read this License Agreement and agree to its terms. This
agreement is complete and supersedes any other agreement that may have related to the subject matter of this
agreement.
82350-
vii
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Telesis Customer Support
Telesis Customer Support offers the following assistance.
Phone Support
Telesis Customer Support offers free phone support to answer questions during normal business hours.
On-Site Service
Telesis can send Customer Support professionals to your facility to perform equipment start-up,
repair, maintenance, and training.
Service Contracts As part of your Service Contract, you receive periodic maintenance and quick on-site customer
support if a problem should occur.
Factory Service
Telesis Customer Support can repair defective parts in our factory to save you money.
Contact Telesis at one of the following locations for more information on any of these services.
If you need parts or service for your marking system, be sure to specify the equipment model number and serial number.
Telesis Technologies, Inc.
Corporate Headquarters
28181 River Drive
P.O. Box 1000
Circleville, Ohio, USA 43113
+1 (740) 477 5000
+1 (800) 654 5696 (U.S. and Canada)
+1 (800) 867 8670 (after hours)
+1 (740) 477 5001 (fax)
email: sales@telesistech.com
email: technical_services@telesistech.com
Telesis Worldwide Locations
For contact information, please visit our website at: www.telesis.com
viii
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Safety Summary
The TMC470 Controller uses high voltage power supplies. The marking head and its optional accessories inherently move
and reposition during system operations. Accordingly, there is some danger when working with, and near, marking
machines. The following safety precautions should be observed at all times.
 Never use the system in any manner or for any purpose other than that for which it was designed.
 Do not connect or disconnect components while power is applied to the system.
 Do not remove or defeat the safety features or protective guards.
 Always wear eye protection when operating the marking system.
 Ear protection may be required when working with or near an operating marking system.
 Keep all body parts, jewelry, and clothing clear of the marking system while it is operating.
Warnings, Cautions, and Notes may be placed throughout this document to alert you to important information. These
messages have the following significance.
Warnings contain information that is essential to the personal safety of the user.
Cautions contain information that is essential to avoid damage to the equipment.
Notes call attention to information of special importance at specific points within the text.
82350-
ix
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
The following Warnings and Cautions are contained in this document.
WARNING
Stay clear of the marking system when placing the machine online to avoid
contact with the moving equipment.
Stay clear of the marking system when jogging the machine to avoid contact
with the moving equipment.
When the Park command is issued, the marking system equipment will
automatically move to its Park position. Stay clear of the marking system when
parking the machine to avoid contact with the moving equipment.
When the Pre-Position command is issued, the marking system equipment will
automatically move to the anchor location of the first field in the pattern. Stay
clear of the marking system when pre-positioning the machine to avoid contact
with the moving equipment.
When the Exercise Test is performed, the marking system equipment will
automatically move around the entire perimeter of the marking window. Stay
clear of the marking system when running the Exercise Test to avoid contact
with the moving equipment.
Certain procedures may require testing electrical circuits while power is
applied to the marking system. To avoid personal injury, only experienced
maintenance personnel should perform these tests. Regardless of experience,
caution should always be used when working with energized electrical circuits.
CAUTION
If the Over Temp signal is ON (), it indicates the controller temperature has
exceeded 65°C (149°F). This is a very serious condition. The software will not
allow any machine movement. If the Over Temp signal is ON, shut down the
controller immediately and contact Telesis Customer Support.
Certain procedures allow the system parameters to be reset to their factory–
default settings. If reset, all parameters that have been specifically configured
for your system will be lost and unrecoverable.
Resetting the Date Code lookup table or the Shift Code lookup table or the
Omni SN parameters will reset all User parameter settings (Date, Shift, and
Omni SN) to their factory default settings. All parameters that have been
specifically configured for your system will be overwritten with the default
values.
Certain tests are available at the Supervisor level to check the operation of the
circuit boards installed in the TMC470 Controller. The tests require special test
equipment. Accordingly, these tests are intended for use by Telesis-authorized
technicians only. Telesis strongly recommends that you do not run these tests
without the appropriate test equipment or without the consent of Telesis
Technologies, Inc.
x
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
This page intentionally left blank.
82350-
xi
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Chapter 1
Controller Operation
1.1 OVERVIEW
This manual documents the use of the TMC470 Controller to operate your Telesis single-pin marking system. The
information in this manual describes the use of the marking system controller and software to operate the marker and to
design, print, and maintain a library of patterns.
This manual should be used along with the Operation Supplement for your marking system. The supplement contains vital,
marker-specific information about the marking system hardware and equipment operation.
1.2 USING THE MARKING SYSTEM
The marking system is designed to permanently print messages into a variety of materials such as steel, aluminum, and plastic.
The shape, size, and location of the marked message are programmed by the pattern designer using the system software.
Marking is accomplished as a hardened pin accelerates to indent the target surface. The software moves the pin cartridge to
precise locations within the marking window and automatically controls pin extension and retraction to mark the message.
1.3 USING THE CONTROLLER
The controller runs the marking system software and generates commands to control the marker.
NOTICE
The TMC470 Controller is capable of operating several Telesis single-pin markers. While most software
features are universally employed in the various systems, some features are unique to specific markers.
Accordingly, some features documented in this manual may not apply to your specific system. Where
variations do exist, they will be clearly identified within the text to inform you of the differences.
The front of the controller provides an 8-line liquid crystal display (LCD), a standard keyboard, and special keys for
operating the marker. It is the primary user interface to the marking system, allowing you to select options and execute
commands displayed by the software. The back panel of the controller includes a power on/off switch and various ports to
connect the marker and additional, optional equipment.
82350-
1-1
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.3.1 Power On / Software Startup
 Locate the power switch on the back panel of the controller (next to the power cable).
 Position the switch to ON (I).
The controller will automatically start and electrical power will be available to all equipment connected to the controller.
The marking system software will automatically start and display the Main Screen (shown below). The system software is
permanently installed in the controller. It produces the user interface screens that are displayed to the operator. Its preprogrammed commands, combined with operator selections and inputs, are used to control the marker. The software also
contains a library for storing user-defined pattern files for printing.
Main Menu
Operational Mode
Operational Status
List of Fields in Pattern
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
No. of Fields in Pattern
Pattern File Name
Operator Mode – Main Screen at Startup
1.3.2 Modes of Operation
The system provides three operating modes: Operator, Designer, and Supervisor.
Operator
Operator mode allows you to open patterns, enter data, print patterns, and jog the machine.
Operator mode features are documented in this chapter.
Designer
Designer mode allows you to perform all tasks available to the operator, plus allows you to design and
edit patterns, configure pattern parameters, and change some system parameters. Access to the this
mode may be password protected to prevent usage by unauthorized persons. Most Designer mode
features are documented in Chapter 2.
Supervisor
Supervisor mode allows you to perform all tasks available to the operator and designer, plus allows you
to configure system operating parameters and check system performance. Access to the this mode may
be password protected to prevent usage by unauthorized persons. Most Supervisor mode features are
documented in Chapter 3.
1-2
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.3.3 Navigation Keys
Use these keys to move the cursor and to select objects on the display screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER
–Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 F1:OPEN
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
Cursor (flashing)
The Cursor is positioned on the name of the currently loaded pattern when the Main Screen is
displayed. It can be repositioned to select one of the fields in the pattern. See TAB, below.
When a function key (F1… F5) is pressed, the cursor moves to the selected item on the Main Menu.
The cursor remains on the Main Menu item to indicate which drop-down menu is displayed.
When an Editor Screen is displayed, the cursor indicates which parameter is currently selected.

The Pointer indicates which menu choice is currently selected. Use the ARROW UP and ARROW DOWN
keys to reposition the pointer.
TAB moves the cursor to the next field (displayed on the Main Screen) or to the next parameter
(displayed on an Editor Screen).
+
BACK TAB moves the cursor to the previous field (displayed on the Main Screen) or to the previous
parameter (displayed on an Editor Screen).
ARROW DOWN moves the cursor to the next field (displayed on the Main Screen) or to the next
parameter (displayed on an Editor Screen). It also moves the pointer to the next menu selection.
ARROW UP moves the cursor to the previous field (displayed on the Main Screen) or to the previous
parameter (displayed on an Editor Screen). It also moves the pointer to the previous menu selection.
ARROW LEFT
When the cursor is positioned in box that can be edited, this key moves the cursor to the left, allowing
you to select where to edit, insert, or delete data.
When the cursor is on a parameter with selectable options, or when the pointer is on a menu line
containing selectable options, this key toggles the selection to the previous option.
ARROW RIGHT
When the cursor is positioned in box that can be edited, this key moves the cursor to the right,
allowing you to select where to edit, insert, or delete data.
When the cursor is on a parameter with selectable options, or when the pointer is on a menu line
containing selectable options, this key toggles the selection to the next option.
PAGE DOWN displays the next page of the current screen if more than one page exists.
PAGE UP displays the previous page of the current screen if more than one page exists.
ESCAPE cancels the current activity and returns to the Main Screen. It also exits the F2:EDIT ,
F4:MARKER and the F5:SETUP sub menus back to the Main Screen.
82350-
1-3
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.3.4 Function Keys
Function keys (F1 through F8) are used to display the various menus and to execute selections from those menus.
From the Main Menu
Use the function keys to display the desired menu.
File. Displays the File Menu to open pattern files for printing.
In Designer and Supervisor mode, this menu allows you to create new pattern files, edit pattern
properties, and manage the pattern file library.
Edit. This menu is not available in Operator mode. It provides commands to add, delete, and edit
objects in the pattern.
Machine. Displays the Machine Menu to perform specific marker tasks (Park, Print, etc.).
Marker. In Operator mode, this allows the user to display the software item number and version.
In Designer mode, this permits the user to enable or disable the marking pin and to backup and
restore of pattern, font, and parameter files.
In Supervisor mode, this allows the user to perform system maintenance tasks.
Setup. Displays the Setup Menu to change operational modes and to edit the Query Text buffers.
In Designer and Supervisor mode, this menu allows you to configure system parameters and perform
system tasks.
From Drop-Down Menus
When a drop-down menu is displayed, the function keys become context sensitive. That is, they perform different tasks
depending on the current menu displayed.
For example, in the screen shown here, the F1 key was pressed to display the File menu.
With the File menu displayed, pressing F1 (again) will execute the Open command to select and load a pattern file.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER
–Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 F1:OPEN
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
1-4
]
]
]
]
]
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.3.5 Marker Operation Keys
Use these keys to perform specific marker operations.
PRINT initiates a print cycle to mark the currently loaded pattern. Note that this key is
available only from the Main Screen and only if the machine is online and a pattern is loaded.
STOP PRINT stops the marker and places it offline. If a print cycle is in process, the marker
will immediately stop printing. If the marker is in motion, it will immediately stop traveling.
Note that this key is available regardless of the screen displayed on the controller.
JOG displays the Jog Screen to interactively position the machine using the system software.
Note that this key is available only from certain screens displayed on the controller.
82350-
1-5
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.3.6 Edit Keys
Use these keys to edit data in the boxes where input is permitted. Note that several of these keys perform additional tasks
when the system is placed in Designer or Supervisor mode.
INSERT toggles the keyboard between insert or overstrike mode when the cursor is positioned in
boxes that accepts data input.
Insert mode adds characters at the cursor location as you type.
Overstrike mode replaces existing characters as you type.
 Key Point…
If the cursor is positioned on the first character in the box, all characters will be deleted
from the box when you begin typing new characters if the box is already full or if the
keyboard is in overstrike mode.
DELETE erases the character at the cursor location when the cursor is positioned in boxes that
accepts data input. In Designer or Supervisor Mode, this key may be used to remove a field from
the selected pattern location.
BACKSPACE deletes the first character to the left of the cursor location.
If the keyboard is in insert mode, characters to the right of the cursor will move to the left as
the cursor moves.
If the keyboard is in overstrike mode, characters to the right of the cursor will remain in place
and deleted characters will be replaced with spaces.
+
SCROLL RIGHT scrolls the content of the box one box-width to the right.
+
SCROLL LEFT scrolls the content of the box one box-width to the left.
CAPS LOCK toggles and locks the keyboard in uppercase or lowercase mode for alphabetic
characters.
Note: If the keyboard beep feature is enabled, the system sounds a short beep when placed in
lowercase mode and a long beep when placed in uppercase mode.
SHIFT, while depressed, places the keyboard in uppercase mode for alphabetic characters. Also
allows data entry of upper characters on keys that display more than one symbol.
ENTER, in Operator Mode, opens the User Text Editor Screen when a variable text tool is selected.
In Designer or Supervisor Mode, ENTER is used to choose or input parameter values. If the cursor is
positioned on a parameter that is enclosed in braces < >, pressing ENTER will toggle through the
available choices. If the cursor is positioned on a parameter that is enclosed in brackets [ ], pressing
ENTER will input the user-supplied parameter value and move the cursor to the next parameter.
1-6
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.3.7 Special Keys
Use these keys to enter special characters into text strings.
Diacritics
Special keystrokes allow you to add diacritics (phonetic symbols) above characters commonly used in foreign languages.
Please note that these symbols are not available for all alphabetic characters.
CIRCUMFLEX adds a circumflex ( ˆ ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: â, ê, î, ô, û)
A-RING adds an a-ring ( ° ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: Å)
+
GRAVE ACCENT adds a grave accent ( ` ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: à, è, ì, ò, ù)
ACUTE ACCENT adds an acute accent ( ´ ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: á, É, é, í, ó, ú)
+
UMLAUT adds an umlaut ( ¨ ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: Ä, ä, ë, ï, Ö, ö, Ü, ü)
TILDE adds a tilde ( ˜ ) above the next character you type.
(available characters: Ã, ã, Õ, õ, Ñ, ñ)
+
Control Characters
Special keystrokes allow you to include certain control characters in the text strings.
GS
or
+G
adds a GS control character to the text string, represented in text as a.
or
or
+R
adds a RS control character to the text string, represented in text as a .
or
or
+T
adds an EOT control character to the text string, represented in text as a .
RS
or
ET
82350-
1-7
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.4 OPEN A PATTERN FILE
The system software allows Designer and Supervisor mode users to save instructions that tell the marking system what to
print, how to print, and where to print. These instructions are called patterns. Patterns are made up of one or more tools –
also called fields. Each field defines a single object in the pattern. Fields define objects that are to be printed or define
commands the marker will execute while processing the pattern.
Pattern files are stored in memory in the controller. The actual number that can be stored is dependent on the content and
complexity of the patterns themselves. Once stored, the patterns can quickly and easily be recalled (opened) and printed.
You must open (or load) an existing pattern before you can print.
 From the Main Screen, press F1 (FILE).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
The system will display the File menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
 From the File menu, press F1 (OPEN).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER
–Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 F1:OPEN
The system will display the Open Pattern Screen.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
 Do one of the following:
 In the Pattern text box, type the name of the
OPEN PATTERN
Pattern: [
pattern file you wish to open (e.g., SAMPLE_02)
then press ENTER.
Total:006 Page: 01 of
02
]
F1–SAMPLE_01
F2–SAMPLE_02
F3–SAMPLE_03
F4–SAMPLE_04
SAMPLE_05
or
F5–
 From the list provided, find the name of the
pattern you wish to open, then press the
function key that corresponds with the desired
pattern. In this example, press F2 to open
pattern SAMPLE_02.
Note: If the pattern name you wish to open
is not shown, press PAGE DOWN to
display more pattern names.
OPEN PATTERN
Pattern: [
Total:006 Page: 01 of
F1–SAMPLE_01
F2–SAMPLE_02
F3–SAMPLE_03
F4–SAMPLE_04
SAMPLE_05
02
]
F5–
The system will return to the Main Screen with the
selected pattern loaded (e.g., SAMPLE_02).
This pattern has two text fields (noted in the upper right
corner) and shown in the list of fields as *001 and 002.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
The asterisk (*) indicates text field 001 permits usersupplied text. You may edit this field to provide data for
printing.
1-8
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.5 PLACE MACHINE ONLINE
The machine may be placed online or offline.
Online, the machine is operationally enabled. The machine must be online to print patterns, to simulate printing, and
to interactively position the equipment using the marking system software.
Offline, the machine is operationally disabled. All print, park, and position commands will be ignored. While offline,
Operator-level users may still open patterns, supply user-text, and edit Query Text buffers. Designer and Supervisor
mode users may still create and edit patterns, change parameters, and change system settings.
When the machine is placed online, the marking system equipment will automatically move to its Home position. This allows
the marker to reset and re-establish its position relative to the marking window.
WARNING
Stay clear of the marking system when placing the machine online to avoid
contact with the moving equipment.
The current machine status (Offline or Online) is
displayed on the second line of the Main Screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
To change the machine status:
 From the Main Screen, press F3 (MACHINE).
The system will display the Machine menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press F1 to see the ON/OFF selection to the desired
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:ON/OFF
status (Online or Offline).
F2:PARK
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F3:PREPOSITION
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text:
F4:GOABCDE
003:[
F5:DRYRUN
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
 When the desired status is displayed, press F1 for
Online or F2 for Offline.
The system will set the machine to the selected
status and return to the Main Screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT MACHINE-On/Off
F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:ONLINE
F3:OFFLIN
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
003:[
]
004:[
]
005:[
]
82350-
1-9
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.6 PARK THE MACHINE
The Park position is where the machine moves when the system finishes printing a pattern or when a Park command is
issued by the operator. It is often defined to move the marking pin out of the way so that you can easily remove and secure
the parts being marked. The Park position is pattern-specific and may be redefined by the pattern designer. Therefore, the
Park position could be a different location for each pattern you open.
WARNING
When the Park command is issued, the marking system equipment will
automatically move to its Park position. Stay clear of the marking system when
parking the machine to avoid contact with the moving equipment.
To park the machine:
 Ensure the machine is online. (see procedure)
 From the Main Screen, press F3 (MACHINE).
The system will display the Machine menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
 Press F2 (PARK).
The system will park the machine and return to the
Main Screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:ON/OFF
F2:PARK
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F3:PREPOSITION
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text:
F4:GOABCDE
003:[
F5:DRYRUN
004:[
005:[
1-10
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.7 PRE-POSITION THE MACHINE
The Pre-position command moves the pin cartridge to the location of the first printable object in the pattern. This feature is
typically used to position the marking head for part alignment before printing. The Pre-position coordinates may be located
anywhere in the marking window since the first printable object may be different for each pattern.
WARNING
When the Pre-Position command is issued, the marking system equipment will
automatically move to the anchor location of the first field in the pattern. Stay
clear of the marking system when parking the machine to avoid contact with
the moving equipment.
To pre-position the machine:
 Ensure the machine is online. (see procedure)
 From the Main Screen, press F3 (MACHINE).
The system will display the Machine menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
 Press F3 (PREPOSITION).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002>
 F1:ON/OFF F7:<ONLINE
The system will position the machine to mark the
first field of the pattern and return to the Main
Screen.
F2:PARK
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F3:PREPOSITION
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text:
F4:GOABCDE
003:[
F5:DRYRUN
004:[
005:[
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
1-11
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.8 ENTER DATA INTO PATTERNS
The pattern designer may define text-based fields that allow you to enter data into the pattern while the system is in
Operator mode. The two types of data that can be entered are User Text and Query Text.
User Text
User text is data that you enter directly into the text string. The user text is used for that field only.
Fields that can accept user text are identified on the Main Screen with an asterisk (*).
Query Text
Query text is data that you enter into the Query Text lookup table. The system uses the table to insert
data into the appropriate text string(s) in the pattern as defined by the pattern designer. This feature
allows you to supply data to multiple text-based fields from a single location.
Note: Fields that accept Query Text are not identified on the Main Screen.
Each method for entering data into the pattern is explained in the following paragraphs.
1.8.1 Enter User Text
To enter user text into a field of the pattern:
 Ensure the pattern is open. (see procedure)
 From the Main Screen, press the DOWN ARROW key.
The cursor will move to the first field in the list.
Notice the first field is identified with an asterisk
(*001). This field accepts user text input.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
Note: If the field you wish to edit is somewhere
else in the list, press the DOWN or UP
ARROW key until the field is selected. If
the field you wish to edit is not shown on
the screen, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP
to display more fields in the pattern (if
available).
]
]
]
]
]
 With the field selected, press ENTER.
The system will open the User Text Editor Screen.
 Type the data in the box [
] (e.g., 12345)
The pattern designer defines the maximum
number of characters you may enter. Optionally, a
label may be defined beside the box (e.g., PART
NUMBER) to help identify what type of data to
enter.
User Text Editor For Field #001
PART NUMBER
[12345 ]
 After entering the data, press F1 (ACCEPT).
The system will return to the Main Screen.
The data you entered will be displayed in the text
string.
F1 ACCEPT
Note: The pattern designer may define the field to
either retain or clear the user text after each print
cycle.


1-12
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
If defined to clear after print, the system will
prompt you to re-enter data before it allows
the next
print cycle to begin.
*001:[TEXT: User Text: 12345
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
If defined to retain data, the pattern will keep
the text you enter and continue to mark it on
subsequent print cycles (provided the
controller is not powered down between
printings).
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.8.2 Enter Query Text
Query text is data you enter into the Query Text lookup table. The system uses the table to insert data into the appropriate
text string(s) in the pattern as defined by the pattern designer. This feature allows you to supply data to multiple textbased fields from a single location.
To enter query text into the Query Text lookup table:
Note: A pattern does not have to be open to edit the Query Text lookup table. In our example, we’ve opened a pattern
named SAMPLE_03 just to show how data in the lookup table is mapped to fields in the pattern.
 From the Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP)
The system will display the Setup Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_03
:004
001:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 1:
002:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 2:
003:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 1:
004:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 3:
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
 From the Setup Menu, press F2 (QUERY TEXT)
The system will display the Query Text lookup
table.
The Query Text lookup table has 20 buffers. There
are five buffers listed on each page. The first page
defines the contents of buffers 1 through 5. The
"| |" indicator on the top line shows which buffers
are currently displayed. Press PAGE DOWN or
PAGE UP to display the other buffers.
Buffer titles (e.g., 1,2,3,4,5 on the left side) can
be edited only by Designer or Supervisor mode
users. Titles help identify what type of data to
enter into each buffer.
Buffer text (on the right side) is where Operator
mode users may enter data into the query text
buffers.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online 
– FPattern:SAMPLE_03
:004
1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
001:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 1:
002:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 2:
003:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 1:
004:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 3:
005:[
QUERY TEXT:
1
2
3
4
5
F1 SAVE
 Type data into the first available slot (e.g., ONE).
 Press the DOWN ARROW key.
The cursor will move to the next buffer.
1-5
6-10
11-15
]
]
]
]
]
16-20
:[
:[
:[
:[
:[
]
]
]
]
]
 Type data into the second slot (e.g., TWO).
 Press the DOWN ARROW key.
QUERY TEXT:
 Type data into the third slot (e.g., THREE).
1
2
3
4
5
F1 SAVE
 After entering the data, press F1 (SAVE).
Note: Pressing ESC will abandon any changes you’ve
made.
The system will return to the Main Screen and
display the data you entered in the appropriate text
string(s).
1-5
6-10
11-15
16-20
:[ONE
:[TWO
:[THREE
:[
:[
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_03
:004
Notice in this example the data from "Slot #1" has been
inserted twice – once in field 001 and again in field 003.
001:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 1: ONE
002:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 2: TWO
003:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 1: ONE
004:[TEXT: Query Text Slot # 3: THREE
005:[
Fields 001 and 003 were both defined to pull data from
the first slot in the Query Text lookup table; field 002
from the second slot; field 004 from the third slot.
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
1-13
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.9 SIMULATE PRINTING (DRYRUN)
You can simulate printing the current pattern without actually firing the marking pin. A dry run allows you to run the
machine through the mechanical motions required to print the objects in the pattern without actually marking. This feature
also allows you to ensure the item to be marked is properly positioned and oriented for the pattern that is currently opened.
To perform a dry run:
 Ensure the pattern is open. (see procedure)
 Ensure the machine is online. (see procedure)
 Do one of the following:
 Hold down the SHIFT key and press the PRINT key
or
 From the Main Screen, press F3 (MACHINE), then press F5 (DRYRUN)
1.10 PRINT PATTERNS
To print a pattern:
 Ensure the pattern is open. (see procedure)
 Ensure the machine is online. (see procedure)
 Ensure the part, pattern, and marker are ready for printing:
Refer to the marker-specific Operation Supplement for details on hardware setup and other marking considerations.
 (optional) Park the machine.
 (optional) Pre-position the machine.
 Position and secure the object to be marked.
 (optional) Perform a dry run.
 Enter User Text or edit Query Text, if applicable. (see procedure)
 Do one of the following:
 Press the PRINT key
or
 From the Main Screen, press F3 (MACHINE), then press F4 (GO)
1.11 STOP THE PRINT CYCLE
Stopping a print cycle aborts the printing operation and places the marker offline. If you stop printing a pattern that
contains serial numbers, you may have to contact the Designer or Supervisor to reset the serial number values before you
resume normal printing operations.
 Press the STOP key
.
The system will display a prompt for you to acknowledge that printing has been aborted.
 Press F1 (ACKNOWLEDGE) to clear the message from the screen.
1-14
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.12 JOG THE MACHINE
The Jog command is used to interactively reposition the machine axes using the marking system software. The Jog
features allow you to move the marking system equipment anywhere within its travel limits.
WARNING
Stay clear of the marking system when jogging the machine to avoid contact
with the moving equipment.
 Ensure the machine is online. (see procedure)
 Press the JOG key
.
The system will display the Jog Screen, similar to the one shown here.
Select the Size of Movement
JOG:
 Verify the cursor is on the Resolution parameter. If
not, press TAB to select it.
The Resolution parameter allows you to choose the
size of each Jog movement.
X/Y
Resolution: <COARSE >
X: [ 0.0000]in
Y: [ 4.0000]in
 Press ENTER to toggle through the available
Resolution selections: Single, Fine, or Coarse.
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
Jog the X/Y Axes
Values displayed in the X and Y boxes show the current
marker
position in the marking window. As the machine moves,
the
system will update coordinates.
JOG:
X/Y
Resolution: <COARSE >
X: [ 0.0000]in
Y: [ 4.0000]in
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to move the
machine left or right along the X-axis.
 Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to move the
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
machine
back and forth along the Y-axis.
Move to a Specific X/Y Location
 Press TAB to select the X-axis box.
JOG:
 Enter the X-axis coordinate where you wish to move
the marker.
X/Y
Resolution: <COARSE >
X: [ 1.0000]in
Y: [ 1.0000]in
 Press TAB to select the Y-axis box.
 Enter the Y-axis coordinate where you wish to move
the marker.
F1 ACCEPT
 Press F2 (GOTO) to move the marker to the specified
F2 GOTO
X/Y coordinate location.
Close the Jog Screen
 Press F1 (or ESC) to close the Jog Screen
82350-
1-15
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
1.13 DISPLAY SYSTEM INFORMATION
In case you need to contact Telesis Customer Support with questions, you’ll need to report the version number and item
number of your system software.
 From the Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
 From the Marker menu, press F1 (ABOUT).
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 F1:ABOUT
The system will display a screen similar to the
following.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
 Record the information displayed on the second and
third lines of the display.
TELESIS TECHNOLOGIES INC.
 Press ESC return to the Main Screen.
xxxxxxx/470 – xxxxxx
Version x.xx
Copyright (c) 2010 All Rights Reserved
1.14 DISPLAY PRINT CYCLE TIME
To display the amount of time it took the system to complete the last print cycle:
 From the Main Screen, press CTRL + T.
The system will display the time on the third line
of the screen (below the pattern name).
The value represents the time interval between
the Start Print command and completion of the
mark. It does not account for time required to
park, move home, etc.
The time is shown in seconds, accurate to 0.001
second. The time display will automatically clear
when the next print cycle is started.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
:035.818 secs
*001:[TEXT: User Text: 12345
]
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
003:[
]
004:[
]
005:[
]
 To clear the time display from the screen manually,
press CTRL + T.
1-16
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Chapter 2
Pattern Design & Management
2.1 OVERVIEW
Patterns are a series of instructions that tell the marking system what to print, where to print, and how to print. These
instructions are saved as pattern files in controller memory. The controller can store up to 200 patterns, depending on the
size of the individual patterns. They can be quickly and easily opened, edited, copied, renamed, printed, or deleted.
Patterns are made up of one or more tools – also called fields. Each field defines a single object in the pattern. Fields can
define printable objects, non-printable (template) objects, or commands that the marker will process when the pattern is
printed. Pattern parameters, options, and field definitions are stored in each pattern file. Changing pattern-specific
parameters and editing fields within the pattern will affect only the pattern being created or edited. It will not affect other
patterns stored in the controller.
This chapter provides instructions and guidelines for creating, editing, and maintaining a library of printable patterns.
This section discusses each of the following topics in detail.







Design considerations
Accessing Designer Mode
Creating a pattern
Saving a pattern
Adding objects to a pattern
Testing a pattern
Editing a pattern







Defining pattern serial numbers
Defining the park position
Defining default text parameters
Adding pattern instructions
Setting axis speeds
Viewing controller library files
Deleting controller library files
2.2 DESIGN CONSIDERATIONS
Although you may be anxious to jump right in and start creating patterns, there are a few design considerations you should
become familiar with before you begin. Understanding the concepts discussed in this section will be extremely beneficial
when you design and edit your patterns. If nothing else, study the Placement of Objects (described below). You’ll find that
grasping these concepts will make pattern design and management much less intimidating, much easier, and much more
flexible than you might think.
The marking system software provides a multitude of parameters for creating patterns. Accordingly, there is no one, single
approach to designing every pattern. Designing patterns is a subjective process. The possibilities and design variations are
endless. We encourage you to experiment with your pattern designs before actually putting them to use. Once you’ve found
the best combination of settings, you can save the pattern and depend on it to produce reliable and consistent results.
Please take a few minutes and study the following design considerations:






Marking Window Size
Placement of Objects
Character Dimensions
Font Selection
Printing Order
Codes and Real-time Data
82350-
2-1
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.2.1 Marking Window Size
The size of the marking window a major consideration in pattern design. The marking window is defined by the travel
limitations of the marking pin – left and right along the X-axis, forward and back along the Y-axis. Any field that is to be
printed must lie, in its entirety, within the physical boundaries of the window. If not, the system will issue an error
message when you attempt to print it. The size of the marking window is dependent on the marking head model your
system employs. Refer to the marker-specific Operation Supplement for details on marking window sizes.
2.2.2 Placement of Objects
Defining exactly where you want to mark something is one of the most important tasks of pattern design. There are two
main components that determine an object’s location: its anchor point and its coordinates. Once these concepts are
understood, the Design Jog feature makes defining the precise location very easy.
Coordinates. Let’s start with coordinates. Each point in the
marking window is identified by a unique X/Y coordinate. The
marking window origin (0,0), is located at the front, left
corner of the window. All other coordinates are relative to
that point, increasing in value to the right along the X-axis
and toward the back of the window along the Y-axis.
Anchor Point. The anchor point is an imaginary reference
point on the object itself. Some objects always use the same
reference point as their anchor (e.g., circles always use their
center point, rectangles always use their lower, left corner,
etc.). However, text-based fields have nine (9) possible
reference points. The four obvious reference points are the four
corners (left/top, right/top, left/bottom, and right/bottom). Five
other not-so-obvious reference points are the center/top,
center/bottom, left/middle, right/middle, and center/middle.
The Justification parameter selections allow you to define which
reference point will be used as the anchor point.
Why is the anchor point so important? Because the system orients the object in the window by placing the anchor point at
the specified coordinates. Changing the coordinate parameters or changing the justification parameters will result in
repositioning the object in the marking window. Note also that if you rotate the object, the system will pivot the object
around its anchor point.
 Key Point…
The resulting anchor point must allow the entire object to reside within the marking window boundaries. It’s
possible to choose an anchor point and justification that attempts to print some of the character string outside the
marking window. This will result in an error message from the system when you attempt to print. You will need to
consider the anchor coordinates, the justification options, and the character dimensions when defining patterns.
Slight adjustments to any one of these three factors be may sufficient to reposition the field within the window.
For example, if you define a text field to be top-justified, the system will place the top of the characters along the
Y-axis at the specified Y-axis coordinate (see below). As you can see, it’s possible to specify an anchor point and
justification combination that attempts to print some of the characters outside of the marking window (see Bottom
Justified). This will result in an error message from the system. You will need to consider the anchor coordinates,
the justification options, and the character dimensions when defining messages to avoid these errors.
2-2
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Design Jog. The design jog feature allows you to interactively position the marker to identify a specific location within the
marking window. Whenever the system displays a screen for you to define a location, you can use the design jog feature to
"show" the software where it is. Instead of trying to measure or calculate the exact axis coordinates of the location, you can
move the impact pin precisely over the desired point and capture its coordinates.
For example, let’s say you want to mark text on a metal plate. Further, let’s say you want to mark a particular corner of the
text (e.g., left/bottom) at a specific location on the plate.
 Key Point…
The machine must be online to jog the marker. Ensure it is online before adding or editing the field.
You’ve already identified three key elements:
TEXT
 the type of object you wish to create (TEXT)
 the text you want to print (e.g., ABC)
 the desired anchor point you wish to use for the
1:
TEXT
Text: [ABC
X: [ 0.0000]in
Y: [ 4.0000]in
text string (LEFT/BOTTOM).
Now, you just need to tell the system where to place the
corner (the anchor point) of the text.
FONT
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
TEXT
 Move the cursor to the X (or Y) parameter.
1:
TEXT
Text: [ABC
X: [ 0.0000]in
Y: [ 4.0000]in
FONT
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
 On the keyboard, press the JOG key
.
The system will display the Jog Screen.
 Use the LEFT, RIGHT, UP, and DOWN ARROW keys to
JOG:
move the marker. Position the impact pin over the
point you want to identify as the anchor point.
Notice as the marker moves, the axis coordinates
are updated on the display.
X/Y
Resolution: <COARSE >
X: [ 1.0000]in
Y: [ 0.2500]in
 When the marker is positioned at the desired anchor
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
TEXT
TOOL
point, press F1 (ACCEPT).
The system will return to the Editor Screen and
insert the coordinates of the current marker
location into the appropriate axis coordinates for
the object.
That’s it! No measuring, no calculations! Just tell
the system what to mark, how to anchor it, and
show it where… and the object is precisely defined
in the marking window.
TEXT
1:
Text: [ABC
X: [ 1.0000]in
Y: [ 0.2500]in
 Key Point…
FONT
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
The resulting location must allow the entire
object to reside within the marking window
boundaries.
82350-
2-3
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.2.3 Character Dimensions
Three parameters that control the size and shape of your printed text are height, width, and pitch.
Height. Height is measured from the center of the mark at the
top of the character to the center of the mark at the bottom of the
character.
Width. Width is measured from the center of the mark at the left
side of the character to the center of the mark at the right side of
the character. Unless there is a specific width requirement for
your text, the width should be 2/3 (66%) of the character height.
Pitch. Pitch defines the distance from the start of one character
to the start of the next character. It includes the width of the
character and the space between characters. Unless there is a
specific character spacing requirement for your text, the pitch
should equal the character height.
2.2.4 Font Selection
The system provides several font selections for printing text strings. The character font determines the printed appearance
of the text. Each font selection provides a specific set of characters. The font determines the shape and composition of
each character. Standard Telesis fonts are illustrated in Appendix A of this manual.
Custom (User) fonts may be designed using the Telesis Logo/Font Generator Utility software. Once created, the user font
file may be downloaded to the controller and used in your patterns. To apply a custom a font to a text field, choose USER
from the list of available fonts. Note that only one custom font may be stored in the controller at a time.
Some factors you may want to consider when selecting a font are the size of the characters to be printed and any special
requirements you may have for printing speed or for character recognition.
Size. The desired size of your marked characters should be a consideration when selecting a font. Very small characters
may have a better appearance with a font containing fewer serifs (e.g., SIMPLEX). Large characters may benefit from a
font containing more serifs, (e.g., COMPLEX or DIN). Characters with more serifs also allow for more delicate shapes.
Speed. Your required marking speed is also a consideration when selecting a font. Certain fonts may require a longer
marking time. Character size also affects the marking speed. Smaller characters may be printed faster; larger characters
and characters with more serifs may require longer printing times. Specific marking times can be verified by a Telesis
representative. You may wish to mark samples with different fonts before deciding on the font for your particular needs.
2-4
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Font Selection (continued)
Character Recognition. The OCR font is specially designed to be used with the Telesis PS-OCR® optical character
reader. In order for the characters to be reliably read by the Reader, a special relationship should exist between the
character height, width, and pitch.
Follow these guidelines for setting the OCR text dimensions:
1.
Decide the height of the characters you want to print.
The height parameter will be used as the basis for establishing
the width and pitch parameters.
2.
Set the width equal to ½ the height.
3.
Set the pitch equal to the height.
These parameter settings will provide a square character block
(height x pitch) with the actual character occupying the first half of
the character block. This relationship will provide a character
height/width ratio that permits the reader to recognize the
characters, and enough space between characters to provide reliable
readings.
For example, if your characters need to be 0.20 in. (0.5 mm) high:
 set the width to 0.10 in. (0.25 mm)
 set the pitch to 0.20 in. (0.5 mm)
2.2.5 Printing Order
The marker prints the fields of a pattern in the order
they are listed in the pattern definition. This order is
also displayed on the Main Screen. The marker will print
(or process) the first field in its entirety before moving to
and processing any subsequent fields. Normally, this is
not an issue when you create a pattern. However, it
may be beneficial to process fields in a particular
sequence to improve print cycle efficiency. Or, it may be
necessary to ensure certain fields are processed before
others. If the sequence is important, you can edit the
pattern and rearrange the field order. See Edit Patterns
(Move Fields) for details.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT: User Text: 12345
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[GOTO
004:[PAUSE
005:[ARC
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
2-5
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.2.6 Codes and Real-time Data
The software allows you to include special message flags in your text strings to insert codes and real-time data into the
printed pattern. The system provides a wide variety of message flags to insert such things as times, dates, and serial
numbers. Certain flags allow operators to supply data during the print cycle; others allow you to encode the year, month,
or work shift in the printed text.
Message flags consists of the percent symbol (%) followed the flag character. The flag character is case-sensitive, so be
sure to use upper- or lowercase characters, as appropriate. Serial number flags (%#S) and variable text flags (%#V) allow
you to specify an integer value (e.g., %5S). The integer indicates the maximum number of characters the inserted data
may occupy. Query text message flags also use an integer (1, 2, … 20) to identify the query text buffer.
The maximum text string length, which includes the data to be inserted by the flag, is limited to 160 characters. Be sure to
account for the expanded length as the system inserts the data into the field. Don’t forget to include appropriate spaces
before or after the message flag if you want to separate the inserted data from the adjacent text.
2-6
Flag
Data Inserted
%A
Weekday: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun
%a
Omni Alpha Character: A, B, C, … Z .................................................. see Omni Serial Number Properties (Chapter 3)
%B
Month: Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec
%C
Date and Time: formatted as MM/DD/YY HH:MM
%D
Day of the Month: 01, 02, 03, … 31
%d
User-defined Day Code ..........................................................................................see Date Code Properties (Chapter 3)
%E
Year Code ...............................................................................................................see Date Code Properties (Chapter 3)
%F
Check Digit, Single Character ......................................................................................... see Error Checking (Chapter 2)
%G
Check Digit, Double Character ........................................................................................ see Error Checking (Chapter 2)
%H
Hour: 00, 01, 02, … 23
%h
User-defined Hour Code ........................................................................................see Date Code Properties (Chapter 3)
%I
Hour: 00, 01, 02, … 12
%J
Julian Day: 001, 002, 003, … 366
%K
Month Code: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, O, N, D
%L
Last Digit of Current Year: 0, 1, 2, … 9
%M
Month: 01, 02, 03, … 12
%N
Minute of Current Hour: 00, 01, 02, … 59
%n
Second of the Current Minute: 00, 01, 02, … 59
%#O
Omni Serial Number (optionally padded with zeroes) ..............................see Omni Serial Number Properties (Chapter 3)
%#o
Omni Serial Number (optionally padded with spaces) .............................see Omni Serial Number Properties (Chapter 3)
%P
Time Suffix: AM or PM
%p
Pattern Name
%#Q
Query Buffer Text: Inserts text from specified buffer (#) .............................................. see Query Text Setup (Chapter 3)
%#q
Query Buffer Title: Inserts title from specified buffer (#)............................................... see Query Text Setup (Chapter 3)
%R
Week Number: 01, 02, 03, … 53 where week 01 contains January 1
%r
Week Number: 01, 02, 03, … 53 where week 01 contains first Thursday of year
%#S
Pattern Serial Number (optionally padded with zeroes) ............................ see Configuring Pattern Properties (Chapter 2)
%#s
Pattern Serial Number (optionally padded with spaces) ........................... see Configuring Pattern Properties (Chapter 2)
%T
Time: formatted as HH:MM
%U
User-defined Month Code......................................................................................see Date Code Properties (Chapter 3)
%#V
Variable Text (padded with spaces) ..................................................................... see Operator-Supplied Text (Chapter 2)
%#v
Variable Text (unpadded) .................................................................................... see Operator-Supplied Text (Chapter 2)
%W
Weekday: 1, 2, 3, … 7 where Sunday is the first day of the week
%w
Weekday: 1, 2, 3, … 7 where Monday is the first day of the week
%X
Date: formatted as MM/DD/YY
%Y
Last Two Digits of Current Year: 00, 01, 02, … 99
%Z
Shift Code............................................................................................................... see Shift Code Properties (Chapter 3)
%%
Percent Sign: This special flag is used to print the percent sign (%) character.
%#=
Field Data: Inserts current data from specified field (#) into the location containing this flag.
%#@
ASCII character: Prints the specified character (#), e.g. ASCII 65=A; Typically for custom fonts.
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Operator-Supplied Text
The software provides two ways for operators to enter data into a pattern: query text flags and variable text flags.
Query Text is a system-level feature since it may be used to affect more than one pattern. For the system to extract
data from the Query Text lookup table and insert it into a text string, the string must include a %#Q flag or a %#q
flag (or both). See Query Text Properties (Chapter 3) for details.
Variable Text is a pattern-level feature since its usage affects only the field in which it is defined. For an Operatorlevel user to enter data into a text string, the string must include a variable text flag (%#V or %#v), where:
#
is an integer that defines the maximum number of characters that may be entered.
Note that variable text strings are limited to 160 characters. (i.e., %160V or %160v).
V
(uppercase "V") The system will pad the field with blanks if the operator enters fewer characters than the
maximum number defined for the field.
v
(lowercase "v") The system will not pad the blanks if the operator enters fewer characters than the maximum
number defined for the field.
For example, consider the following variable text flag entries, the operator input, and the resulting output.
Field Defined As:
Operator Enters:
Marker Prints:
SAMPLE_%5VABC
12345
SAMPLE_12345ABC
SAMPLE_%5VABC
123
SAMPLE_123
SAMPLE_%5vABC
12345
SAMPLE_12345ABC
SAMPLE_%5vABC
123
SAMPLE_123ABC
ABC
Serial Numbers
The software provides two types of serial numbers that can be included in your patterns’ text strings.
Omni Serial Number is a system-level feature since it may be used to affect more than one pattern. The Omni serial
number is stored in the controller’s permanent memory. It allows you to continue a serial number sequence from
pattern to pattern. For the system to insert the Omni serial number, at least one field in the pattern must include an
Omni serial number flag (%#O or %#o or %O or %o). See Omni Serial Number Properties (Chapter 3) for details
and options.
Pattern Serial Number is a pattern-level feature since its usage affects only the pattern in which it’s defined.
The pattern serial number is stored with the pattern parameters. It allows you to continue a separate serial number
sequence for each pattern. For the system to insert the pattern serial number, at least one field in the pattern must
include a pattern serial number flag (%#S or %#s or %S or %s). See Configure Pattern Properties for details and
options.
#
is an optional integer (1 through 9)
If an integer is used, the system will pad the serial number to the specified number of digits. See below.
If an integer is not used, the system will not pad the serial number.
O or S
(uppercase "O" or "S") will pad the serial number with zeros if an integer was specified. See # above.
o or s
(lowercase "o" or "s") will pad the serial number with spaces if an integer was specified. See # above.
The serial number flags may be placed in the text string by itself, or may be included as part of text string.
For example, consider the following serial number flag entries and the resulting output for serial number "1".
Field Defined As:
Marker Prints:
Field Defined As:
Marker Prints:
OMNI_%5O
OMNI_00001
PATTERN_%5S
PATTERN_00001
OMNI_%5o
OMNI_
PATTERN_%5s
PATTERN_
OMNI_%O
OMNI_1
PATTERN_%S
PATTERN_1
OMNI_%o
OMNI_1
PATTERN_%s
PATTERN_1
1
82350-
1
2-7
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Time and Date Insertion
The various time and date flags provide the ability to include the current time, date, or shift in the marked message. The
controller’s internal clock is the source of the date and time information. Simply include the desired flag in your text string,
where appropriate.
Coded Information
Certain flags allow you to define code characters that represent the current year, current month, day, hour, or current work
shift. The system uses the controller’s internal clock/calendar and the appropriate look-up table to insert the code
characters into the text string. Refer to the following sections for details.


Shift Code Properties (Chapter 3)
Date Code Properties (Chapter 3)
Error Checking
Special flags can be used to assist in error checking when your marked message will be read by a Telesis PS-OCR optical
character reader. The check character flags may be used to append a one- or two-digit character at the end of the text
string. The check characters are calculated by the system based on the hexadecimal sum of the characters in the text
string. The resulting checksum character is then inserted into the message. The reader can then interpret the text string,
perform its own checksum calculation, and verify that the check characters in the message match its calculated checksum
results. The %F and %G flags, if used, must be placed at the end of the text string. The %F flag inserts a single check
character at the end of the message. The %G flag inserts two check characters at the end of the message. The single
check digit should be used only when space constraints prohibit the use of two check characters.
2-8
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.3 ACCESS DESIGNER MODE
The system must be placed in Designer mode (or Supervisor mode) to create and edit patterns.
To place the system in Designer mode:
 From the Operator Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP)
and F1 for Level.
The system will display the Setup menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline–Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:LEVEL
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:QUERY TEXT
]
]
]
]
]
 Press F2 Designer.
The system will display the Password prompt.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER
F5:SETUP
SETUP LEVEL
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1: OPERATOR
F2: DESIGNER
001:[
F2:SUPERVISOR ]
002:[
]
003:[
]
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Type the password into the Enter Password box. If a
password has not been defined, leave the box empty
(blank).
Note: A password may be defined to restrict access
to Designer-level features. Refer to System
Passwords (Chapter 3) for details.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press F1 (ACCEPT).
The system will return to the Main Screen.
The system displays DESN to indicate it is in Designer
mode. Although the Main Screen looks the same as
Operator Mode, the drop-down menus now provide many
more options and privileges.
Enter Password [
F1 ACCEPT
]
F2 CANCEL
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
2-9
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.4 CREATE NEW PATTERNS
The system provides two methods for creating new patterns. The Pattern Wizard allows you to create simple patterns using
only text fields. The Pattern Editor allows you to create complex patterns using all types of fields and options.
2.4.1 Using the Pattern Wizard
The Pattern Wizard may be used to define a pattern that contains only text fields. The wizard allows you to supply the basic
information required to define the fields, and lets the system provided the other parameter details based on your primary
input.
To create a new pattern using the wizard:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
001:[
]
F3:SAVE
002:[
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
press F1 (FILE).
The system will display the File menu.
 From the File menu, press F72 to open the NEW
menu.
FFILE-NEW
1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 F1:PATTERN
F
2:WIZARD
001:[
]
 Press F2 WIZARD.
Note: If a pattern is already open when you
attempt to create a new one, the system will
prompt you to save any changes to the
existing pattern before proceeding.
The system will display the Text Tool Wizard
Screen ready to define the first text field.
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
The top line shows the field number that is currently
being defined (e.g., Field # 01).
 Verify the cursor is on the Text parameter.
Text Tool Wizard
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Text parameter defines the content of the
character string. The text string may contain up to
160 characters including uppercase and lowercase
characters, keyboard symbols, blank spaces,
message flags, and special characters.
Refer to Codes and Real-time Data (Chapter 2) and
Special Keys – Control Characters (Chapter 1) for
details.
Text: [
Height: [
X: [
Y: [
 Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
...Field # 01
]
0.125]in
3.000]in
4.000]in
Font :
<SIMPLEX>
F1-ADD TO PATTERN
F2-TEST
ESC-EXIT
Text Tool Wizard
...Field # 01
 Type the desired height dimension.
Text: [
Height: [
X: [
Y: [
The wizard will automatically set the character
width to 2/3 the character height, and set the
character pitch equal to the character height. Refer
to Character Dimensions for details.
]
0.125]in
3.000]in
4.000]in
F1-ADD TO PATTERN
2-10
82350-
Font :
<SIMPLEX>
F2-TEST
ESC-EXIT
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Using the Pattern Wizard (continued)
 Press TAB to select the X (or Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the text string will be anchored
(top, left justified) in the marking window.
Text Tool Wizard
Text: [
Height: [
X: [
Y: [
 Do one of the following:
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis
...Field # 01
]
0.125]in
3.000]in
4.000]in
Font :
<SIMPLEX>
F1-ADD TO PATTERN
F2-TEST
ESC-EXIT
Text Tool Wizard
...Field # 01
box.
or
 Use the default values provided by the system.
As text fields are added, the wizard
automatically adjusts the X/Y coordinates to separate
the fields. Each field is anchored at the same X-axis
coordinate as the previous field and at a Y-axis
coordinate below the previous field a distance equal to
1½ times the character height.
 Press TAB to select the Font parameter.
The Font parameter defines the character set that
will be used to print the text string. It determines
the shape and appearance of the characters. Refer
to Font Selection for details.
Text: [
Height: [
X: [
Y: [
 Press ENTER until the desired font is displayed.
]
0.125]in
3.000]in
4.000]in
Font :
<SIMPLEX>
F1-ADD TO PATTERN
F2-TEST
ESC-EXIT
Text Tool Wizard
...Field # 02
 Press F1 (ADD TO PATTERN) to save the text field
parameters and add the field to the pattern.
The top line of the Text Tool Wizard Screen
changes to show the next field is ready to be
defined (e.g., Field # 02). You may continue to use
the wizard to define additional text fields as
needed.
Text: [
Height: [
X: [
Y: [
 Press F2 (TEST) to verify the fields you’ve defined will
]
0.125]in
3.000]in
3.812]in
F1-ADD TO PATTERN
print within the boundaries of the marking window.
An error message will be displayed if the system
encounters a problem.
 After all text fields are defined, press ESC to exit the
Font :
<SIMPLEX>
F2-TEST
ESC-EXIT
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
001:[
]
F3:SAVE
002:[
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
wizard. The system will return to the Main Screen.
 Press F1 (FILE) to display the File menu.
 From the File Menu, press F4 (SAVE-AS) to save the
new pattern. Refer to Save/Name/Copy Patterns for
details.
82350-
2-11
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.4.2 Using the Pattern Editor
When you create a new pattern using the Pattern Editor, the system uses the default pattern parameters to produce an
empty pattern. Once created, you can define objects to be printed, define commands to be processed during the print cycle,
and change the pattern parameters to suit your preferences.
To create a new pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
001:[
]
F3:SAVE
002:[
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
press F1 (FILE).
The system will display the File menu.
 From the File menu, press F7 to toggle the NEW
selection to PATTERN.
NEW
F1FILE:FILE F
2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:PATTERN
F2:WIZARD
001:[
]
002:[
]
003:[
]
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F2 (NEW).
Note: If a pattern is already open when you
attempt to create a new one, the system will
prompt you to save any changes to the
existing pattern before proceeding.
The system will display the Main Screen and show
an empty, unnamed pattern (UNTITLED).
You can now proceed to define your pattern objects and
set your pattern parameters. Refer to the appropriate
section to perform the following tasks:



2-12
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
Save & Name Patterns
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
Define Objects in Patterns
Configure Pattern Properties
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.5 SAVE/NAME/COPY PATTERNS
New patterns and changes to existing patterns are not stored in controller memory until you save them. Once saved, they
can be recalled (opened) for printing or edited whenever necessary. You can also create a copy of a pattern by opening an
existing pattern and saving it under a new pattern name.
You must save the pattern being edited before opening another pattern. Otherwise, you will lose any changes made since it
was last saved. You should make it a standard practice to periodically save your pattern, especially during an extended
period of editing.
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
press F1 (FILE).
The system will display the File menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
Saving a New Pattern or Making a Copy
 From the File menu, press F4 (SAVE-AS).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
001:[
]
F3:SAVE
002:[
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
The system will display the Pattern Save Editor
Screen to name and save the pattern.
 Type the pattern name in the Save As box.
For new patterns, the screen displays the name
“UNTITLED” to indicate this pattern has never been
saved. This is a reserved name and cannot be
used. You must provide another name for your
pattern.



Each pattern must be given a unique name to
identify it. The pattern name may be up to
31 alphanumeric characters long and may
include spaces. Leading and trailing spaces,
though allowed, are highly discouraged.
Pattern Save Editor
If the name is greater than 10 characters, it
may be abbreviated when shown on the
display screens.
Save As: [UNTITLED
Name: UNTITLED
If a pattern will be remotely loaded using the
system I/O signals, it must be named one of
the reserved pattern names (PAT001 through
PAT127). See Remote Pattern Selection for
details.
]
F1 SAVE
 Press F1 (SAVE) to save and store the pattern.
The system will return to the Main Screen.
Saving an Existing Pattern
 From the File menu, press F3 (SAVE).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 F1:OPEN
The system will save the pattern under the current
name and return to the Main Screen.
F2:NEW
001:[
F3:SAVE
002:[
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
2-13
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6 DEFINE OBJECTS IN PATTERNS
After you create the pattern, you’ll need to add fields to define the content, format, and location of the data you want to
print. There are many types of fields you may define in a pattern.
Text-based Objects



Text
ArcText (radius method)
ArcText 3P (3-pt method)
Geometric Objects
Commands




Arc (radius method)


Circle



Ellipse 3P (3-pt method)
Arc 3P (3-pt method)
Block Object
Box
Ellipse (radius method)




GoTo


Serial
Pause
Input
Outpu
t
Machi
ne
Line (start method)
Line (start/end method)
A pattern may contain up to 999 fields. When you add a field to the pattern, the system places it at the end of a sequential
list. During the print cycle, the system processes the fields in the order listed (first to last). If you prefer, you can
rearrange the list to control the order in which they are processed. See Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
2.6.1 Text
Each text field defines the content, size, shape, and location of a single string of characters.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a text field to the pattern:
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT) then press F1:TOOL for the Tool
Menu
The system will display the Edit Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
FTOOL:
1:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE
F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
COMMON
GRAPHIC
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
F1:TEXT
]
F001:[
2:ARC TEXT
]
F002:[
3:ARC TEXT 3P
]
F003:[
4:BLOCK
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press Page up/down to select the COMMON page.
 Press F1:TEXT to add the text field to the pattern.
2-14
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Text Field Parameters (continued)
The system will display the Text Editor Screen for you to define the field. The parameters are displayed on four separate
pages (Text, Font, Tool, and User).
The first page contains the Text parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Text parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Text parameter defines the content of the
character string. The text string may contain up to
160 characters including uppercase and lowercase
characters, keyboard symbols, blank spaces,
message flags, and special characters.
Message flags may be used to insert real-time
data into the printed message (e.g., dates, time,
codes, serial numbers, etc.). See Codes and
Real-time Data for details.
Special characters, like control characters (e.g.,
EOT) and language phonetic symbols (e.g., ö),
may be entered into the text string. Refer to
Special Keys – Control Characters (Chapter 1) for details.
TEXT
4:
TEXT
Text: [
X: [ 0.0000]in
Y: [ 4.0000]in
FONT
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
 Type the desired data into the Text box.
 Press TAB to select the X (or Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the text string will be anchored
in the marking window.
TEXT
4:
TEXT
Text: [
X: [ 0.0000]in
Y: [ 4.0000]in
 Do one of the following:
 Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the anchor location.
FONT
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis
box.
82350-
2-15
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Text Field Parameters (continued)
 Press TAB to select the X Just parameter.
The X Just parameter defines how the text will be
aligned at the X-axis coordinate. See illustration.
TEXT
4:
TEXT
Text: [
X: [ 0.0000]in
Y: [ 4.0000]in
 Press ENTER until the desired X-axis justification is
displayed (Left, Center, or Right).
 Press TAB to select the Y Just parameter.
The Y Just parameter defines how the text will be
aligned at the Y-axis coordinate. See illustration.
FONT
TOOL
USER
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
 Press ENTER until the desired Y-axis justification is
displayed (Top, Middle, or Bottom).
 Key Point…
If you select Top alignment and print special characters with ascenders (e.g., É) the marker will use the top of the
special character as the upper limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not use the top of the
uppercase characters for alignment. See illustration.
Similarly, if you select Bottom alignment and print lowercase characters, the marker will use the bottom of the
lowercase descenders (e.g., g) as the lower limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not use the
bottom of the uppercase characters as the baseline. See illustration.
 Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter allows you to rotate the text
string in a counterclockwise direction. Note that an
angle of 0° indicates no rotation. See illustration.
TEXT
TEXT
Text: [
X: [ 0.0000]in
Y: [ 4.0000]in
 Enter the rotation (degrees) in the Angle box.
The text always pivots on its anchor point. Since
the X/Y Just parameters determine the anchor
point, they have a significant impact on how the
rotated text will appear. See illustration.
2-16
4:
FONT
TOOL
]
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
82350-
USER
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Text Field Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Font parameters.
TEXT
 Verify the cursor is on the Font parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
The Font parameter defines the character set that
will be used to print the text string. It determines
the shape and appearance of the characters. Refer
to Font Selection for details.
4:
TEXT
FONT
TOOL
USER
Font : <SIMPLEX>
Height: [ 0.1250]in
Width : [ 0.0830]in
Pitch : [ 0.1250]in
F1 ACCEPT
 Press ENTER until the desired font is displayed.
The next three parameters define the physical size of the characters. See illustration.
Height is the distance from the center of the mark at the
top of the character to the center of the mark at the
bottom.
Width is the distance from the center of the mark at the
left of the character to the center of the mark at the right.
Pitch is the distance from the start of one character to
the start of the next character, including the space
between characters.
 Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
 Key Point…
You can manually enter width and pitch dimensions or have the system automatically calculate them based on the
character height.
 Do one of the following:
 Automatically Set Width & Pitch. Type the
desired height dimension, then press ENTER. The
system will automatically calculate and apply the
width and pitch dimensions based on the height.
TEXT
4:
TEXT
FONT
TOOL
USER
Font : <SIMPLEX>
Height: [ 0.1250]in
Width : [ 0.0830]in
Pitch : [ 0.1250]in
or
 Manually Set Width & Pitch. Type the desired
height dimension, then press TAB. The system
will leave the Width and Pitch dimensions
unchanged for you to define them manually.
F1 ACCEPT
82350-
2-17
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Text Field Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters..
The third page contains the Tool parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter. If
TEXT
not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this text string.
4:
TEXT
FONT
TOOL
USER
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
 indicates this text string will be printed.
 indicates this text string will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The fourth page contains the User parameters.
The User parameters are used by the system only when
the text string contains a variable text flag. The flag
(%#V or %#v) allows users to enter text into the field
while the system is in Operator mode.
TEXT
 Verify the cursor is on the Title parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
The Title parameter defines a label that will be
displayed next to the box where the user enters
data. The label can help identify what type of data
the user is to enter.
4:
TEXT
FONT
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
USER
]
F1 ACCEPT
 Type in the desired text to define a title for the field.
 Press TAB to select the User Text parameter.
The User Text parameter allows you to define a
default text string for the variable text. The default
string will reside in the field until actual usersupplied text is entered, until the pattern is closed,
or until the controller is powered off. See Save in
Query Buffer parameter (below) for more
information on retaining user-supplied text.
TEXT
TEXT
FONT
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
F1 ACCEPT
 Type in the desired text to define the default string.
2-18
4:
82350-
USER
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Text Field Parameters (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Clear User parameter.
The Clear User parameter determines how the
system handles the user-supplied data after the
print cycle is complete.
If enabled, the system will clear (delete) the usertext from the field after the pattern prints. If
another print cycle is attempted with the user text
field empty, the system will display an Error screen
stating “ Variable Text Field Not Found”.
If disabled, the system keeps the user-text in the
field until it is manually cleared or edited, until the
pattern is closed, or until the controller is powered
off. See Save in Query Buffer parameter (below) for
more information on retaining user-supplied text.
TEXT
4:
TEXT
FONT
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
USER
]
F1 ACCEPT
 Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
 indicates the user-supplied text will be cleared.
 indicates the user-supplied text will be retained.
 Press TAB to select the Save in Query Buffer
parameter.
The Save in Query Buffer parameter allows you to
save the user-supplied text in one of the query text
buffers. This retains data when it would normally be
cleared by the system.
TEXT
 Type the number of the query text buffer (01… 20)
4:
TEXT
FONT
TOOL
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
]
where you wish to store the data.
Note: Entering 00 effectively disables the save
feature (i.e., the user-text will not be saved).
USER
]
F1 ACCEPT
 After all text field parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
82350-
2-19
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
ArcText (Radius Method)
The ArcText features allow you to "bend" a text string in your printed message. The ArcText tool combines features of the
Radius Arc tool and the Text tool to define the curved text string. The system constructs the arc text string using a center
location and a radius to define a circular path. It also uses a start angle to define where the arc begins on the circular path.
The ending point is determined by the length of the text string. Most parameters for defining the text string are the same as
for standard text fields. The actual contour of the arc text string is determined by its character dimensions, font style, and
selected shape (convex or concave).
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add an arc text field to the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
F2:COMMAND
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
press F2 (EDIT). Then F1 TOOL.
The system will display the Tool Menu.
 Press F2 to select the ARCTEXT menu.
F1TOOL:
:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE
F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
COMMON
GRAPHIC
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
F1:TEXT
001:[
F2:ARC TEXT
002:[
F3:ARC TEXT 3P
003:[
F4:BLOCK
004:[
005:[
The system will display the ArcText (Radius) Editor
Screen for you to define the arc text string. The
parameters are displayed on five separate pages
(Text, Font, User, Arc, and Tool). The  symbol on
the top line indicates additional pages are available.
]
]
]
]
]
The first page contains the Text parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Text parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Text parameter defines the content of the
character string. The text string may contain up to
160 characters including uppercase and lowercase
characters, keyboard symbols, blank spaces,
message flags, and special characters.
Message flags may be used to insert real-time
data into the printed message (e.g., dates, time,
codes, serial numbers, etc.). See Codes and
Real-time Data for details.
4:
TEXT
Text: [
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 2.0000]in
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
 Type the desired data into the Text box.
82350-
FONT
USER
]
F1 ACCEPT
Special characters, like control characters (e.g.,
EOT) and language phonetic symbols (e.g., ö),
may be entered into the text string. Refer to
Special Keys – Control Characters (Chapter 1) for details.
2-20
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)

TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
 Press TAB to select the X (or Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the center of the circular path
will be placed in the marking window.
 Do one of the following:
 Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the center location.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
4:
TEXT
FONT
Text: [
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 2.0000]in
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
USER

]
F1 ACCEPT
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis
box.
 Press TAB to select the X Just parameter.
The X Just parameter defines how the arc text
string will be aligned at the arc text anchor point.
See illustration.
 Press ENTER until the desired X-axis justification is
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
4:
TEXT
FONT
Text: [
X: [ 3.0000]in
Y: [ 2.0000]in
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
USER

]
displayed (Left, Center, or Right).
 Press TAB to select the Y Just parameter.
F1 ACCEPT
The Y Just parameter defines how the arc text
string will be aligned with the curvature of the arc.
See illustration.
 Press ENTER until the desired Y-axis justification is displayed (Top, Middle, or Bottom).
 Key Point…
If you select Top alignment and print special characters with ascenders (e.g., É) the marker will use the top of the
special character as the upper limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not use the top of the
uppercase characters for alignment.
Similarly, if you select Bottom alignment and print lowercase characters, the marker will use the bottom of the
lowercase descenders (e.g., g) as the lower limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not use the
bottom of the uppercase characters as the baseline.
82350-
2-21
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Font parameters.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
 Verify the cursor is on the Font parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Font parameter defines the character set that
will be used to print the arc text string. It
determines the shape and appearance of the
characters. Refer to Font Selection for details.
4:
TEXT
FONT
USER

Font : <SIMPLEX>
Height: [ 0.1250]in
Width : [ 0.0830]in
Pitch : [ 0.1250]in
F1 ACCEPT
 Press ENTER until the desired font is displayed.
The next three parameters define the physical size of the
characters. See illustration.
Height is the distance from the center of the mark at the
top of the character to the center of the mark at the
bottom.
Width is the distance from the center of the mark at the
left of the character to the center of the mark at the right.
Pitch is the distance from the start of one character to
the start of the next character, including the space
between characters.
 Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
 Key Point…
You can manually enter width and pitch dimensions or have the system automatically calculate them based on the
character height.
 Do one of the following:
 Automatically Set Width & Pitch. Type the
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
desired height dimension, then press ENTER.
The system will automatically calculate and apply
the width and pitch dimensions based on the
height.
TEXT
Font : <SIMPLEX>
Height: [ 0.1250]in
Width : [ 0.0830]in
Pitch : [ 0.1250]in
or
 Manually Set Width & Pitch. Type the desired
F1 ACCEPT
height dimension, then press TAB. The system
will leave the Width and Pitch dimensions
unchanged for you to define them manually.
2-22
4:
82350-
FONT
USER

TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The third page contains the User parameters.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
The User parameters are used by the system only when
the arc text contains a variable text flag. The flag (%#V
or %#v) allows users to enter text into the field while the
system is in Operator mode.
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
 Verify the cursor is on the Title parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
The Title parameter defines a label that will be
displayed next to the box where the user enters
data. The label can help identify what type of data the user is to enter.
4:
TEXT
FONT
USER

]
]
F1 ACCEPT
 Type in the desired text to define a title for the field.
 Press TAB to select the User Text parameter.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
The User Text parameter allows you to define a
default text string for the variable text. The default
string will reside in the field until actual usersupplied text is entered, until the pattern is closed,
or until the controller is powered off. See Save in
Query Buffer parameter (below) for more
information on retaining user-supplied text.
4:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
FONT
USER

]
]
F1 ACCEPT
 Type in the desired text to define the default string.
 Press TAB to select the Clear User parameter.
The Clear User parameter determines how the
system handles the user-supplied data after the
print cycle is complete.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
If enabled, the system will clear (delete) the usertext from the field after the pattern prints. If
another print cycle is attempted with the user text
field empty, the system will display an Error
screen stating “ Variable Text Field Not Found”.
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
If disabled, the system keeps the user-text in the
field until it is manually cleared or edited, until the
pattern is closed, or until the controller is powered
off. See Save in Query Buffer parameter (below)
for more information on retaining user-supplied
text.
4:
TEXT
FONT
USER

]
]
F1 ACCEPT
 Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
 indicates the user-supplied text will be cleared.
 indicates the user-supplied text will be retained.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
4:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
 Press TAB to select the Save in Query Buffer
parameter.
The Save in Query Buffer parameter allows you to
save the user-supplied text in one of the query
text buffers. This retains data when it would
normally be cleared by the system.
FONT
USER

]
]
F1 ACCEPT
 Type the number of the query text buffer (01… 20)
where you wish to store the data.
Note: Entering 00 effectively disables the save feature (i.e., the user-text will not be saved).
82350-
2-23
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The fourth page contains the Arc parameters.
The Arc parameters define the size of the arc, the location where the text will begin on the arc, and whether the text shape
is convex or concave .
 Verify the cursor is on the Radius parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Radius parameter defines the size of the arc.
The system constructs a circular path using the
center point and radius that you specify. See
illustration.
 Type the desired radius in the box.
4: 
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Radius:
Start:
ARC
TOOL
[ 1.0000]in
[ 0.0000]°
Curve: Concave 
Convex 
F1 ACCEPT
Ensure the radius is not so large that it will
position the arc outside the available marking
window.
 Press TAB to select the Start parameter.
The Start parameter defines where the arc text
will be anchored. The anchor point is that
location where the start angle intersects the
circular path. See illustration. Angular
measurements around the center point begin
at the 3 o’clock position (0°) and increase in
the counterclockwise direction.
4: 
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Radius:
Start:
ARC
TOOL
[ 1.0000]in
[ 0.0000]°
Curve: Concave 
Convex 
F1 ACCEPT
 Type the Start angle to identify the arc text
anchor point.
 Press TAB to select the Curve parameter.
The Curve parameter defines the shape of the
curved text string (convex or concave). Unlike
arcs which are always constructed in a
counterclockwise direction, the system use the
Curve parameter selection to construct the
string in either a clockwise or a counterclockwise
direction. Additionally, the X Just and Y Just
(alignment) parameters affect how the text
string is aligned at the anchor point. See
illustration (above).
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
Radius:
Start:
4: 
[ 1.0000]in
[ 0.0000]°
Curve: Concave 
Convex 
F1 ACCEPT
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired shape, then press ENTER.
2-24
82350-
ARC
TOOL
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Radius ArcText Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The fifth page contains the Tool parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this arc text string.
ARCTEXT(RADIUS)
4: 
ARC
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
 indicates this arc text string will be printed.
 indicates this arc text string will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
 After all radius arc text parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
Radius ArctText Tips
Consider the following factors when defining radius arc text.



Reduce the radius of the arc to sharpen (increase) the curvature of the text.

If an arc text string is positioned slightly outside of the marking window, try changing the alignment:
– If the arc text is convex, try changing the X Just parameter to top or center alignment.
– If the arc text is concave, try changing the Y Just parameter to bottom or middle alignment.
Increase the radius of the arc to flatten (decrease) the curvature of the text.
Experiment with the Start parameter, X/Y parameters, and the X Just and Y Just parameters.
Slight adjustments of these parameters will reposition the text location along the arc path.
82350-
2-25
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
ArcText 3P (3-point Method)
The ArcText 3P features allow you to "bend" a text string in your printed message. ArcText 3P combines the features of the
Arc 3P tool and the Text tool to define a curved text string. The system constructs an ArcText 3P string using a start point,
a center point, and an end point. The system defines a circular path that encompasses all three points. Most parameters
for defining the text string are the same as for standard text fields. The actual contour of the arc text string is determined
by its character dimensions, font style, and selected shape (convex or concave).
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a 3-point arc text field to the pattern:
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT). Then F1 TOOL .
The system will display the TOOL Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press F3 to select the ARCTEXT 3P menu.
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
TOOL:
COMMON
GRAPHIC
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
F1:TEXT
F2:ARC TEXT
001:[
]
F3:ARC TEXT 3P
002:[
]
F4:BLOCK
003:[
]
004:[
]
005:[
]
The system will display the ArcText (3 Point) Editor
Screen for you to define the arc text string. The
parameters are displayed on five separate pages
(Text, Font, User, Arc, and Tool). The  symbol on
the top line indicates additional pages are
available.
The first page contains the Text parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Text parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
The Text parameter defines the content of the
character string. The text string may contain up to
160 characters including uppercase and lowercase
characters, keyboard symbols, blank spaces,
message flags, and special characters.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Text: [
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
Message flags may be used to insert real-time
data into the printed message (e.g., dates, time,
codes, serial numbers, etc.). See Codes and
Real-time Data for details.
TEXT
 Type the desired data into the Text box.
82350-
FONT
USER
]
Curve:
Concave 
Convex 
F1 ACCEPT
Special characters, like control characters (e.g.,
EOT) and language phonetic symbols (e.g., ö),
may be entered into the text string. Refer to
Special Keys – Control Characters (Chapter 1) for details.
2-26
4:

TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3-Point ArcText Parameters (continued)
 Press TAB to select the X Just parameter.
The X Just parameter defines how the arc text
string will be aligned at the arc text anchor point.
See illustration.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
 Press ENTER until the desired X-axis justification is
4:
Text: [
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
displayed (Left, Center, or Right).
 Press TAB to select the Y Just parameter.
The Y Just parameter defines how the arc text
string will be aligned with the curvature of the arc.
TEXT
FONT
USER

]
Curve:
Concave 
Convex 
F1 ACCEPT
 Press ENTER until the desired Y-axis justification is
displayed (Top, Middle, or Bottom).
 Key Point…
If you select Top alignment and print special characters with ascenders (e.g., É) the marker will use the top of the
special character as the upper limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not use the top of the
uppercase characters for alignment.
Similarly, if you select Bottom alignment and print lowercase characters, the marker will use the bottom of the
lowercase descenders (e.g., g) as the lower limit and align the other characters accordingly. It will not use the
bottom of the uppercase characters as the baseline.
 Press TAB to select the Curve parameter.
The Curve parameter defines the shape of the
curved text string (convex or concave). Unlike arcs
which are always constructed in a counterclockwise
direction, the system use the Curve parameter
selection to construct the string in either a
clockwise or a counterclockwise direction.
Additionally, the X Just and Y Just (alignment)
parameters affect how the text string is aligned at
the anchor point. See illustration (above).
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Text: [
X Just: < Left >
Y Just: < Top >
4:
TEXT
FONT
USER

]
Curve:
Concave 
Convex 
F1 ACCEPT
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired shape, then press ENTER.
82350-
2-27
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3-Point ArcText Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Font parameters.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
 Verify the cursor is on the Font parameter. I
f not, press TAB to select it.
The Font parameter defines the character set that
will be used to print the arc text string. It
determines the shape and appearance of the
characters. Refer to Font Selection for details.
4:
TEXT
FONT
USER

Font : <SIMPLEX>
Height: [ 0.1250]in
Width : [ 0.0830]in
Pitch : [ 0.1250]in
F1 ACCEPT
 Press ENTER until the desired font is displayed.
The next three parameters define the physical size of the characters. See illustration.
Height is the distance from the center of the mark at the
top of the character to the center of the mark at the
bottom.
Width is the distance from the center of the mark at the
left of the character to the center of the mark at the right.
Pitch is the distance from the start of one character to
the start of the next character, including the space
between characters.
 Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
 Key Point…
You can manually enter width and pitch dimensions or have the system automatically calculate them based on the
character height.
 Do one of the following:
 Automatically Set Width & Pitch. Type the
desired height dimension, then press ENTER.
The system will automatically calculate and apply
the width and pitch dimensions based on the
height.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
TEXT
Font : <SIMPLEX>
Height: [ 0.1250]in
Width : [ 0.0830]in
Pitch : [ 0.1250]in
or
 Manually Set Width & Pitch. Type the desired
F1 ACCEPT
height dimension, then press TAB. The system
will leave the Width and Pitch dimensions
unchanged for you to define them manually.
2-28
4:
82350-
FONT
USER

TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3-Point ArcText Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The third page contains the User parameters.
The User parameters are used by the system only when the arc text contains a variable text flag. The flag (%#V or %#v)
allows users to enter text into the field while the system is in Operator mode.
 Verify the cursor is on the Title parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Title parameter defines a label that will be
displayed next to the box where the user enters
data. The label can help identify what type of data
the user is to enter.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
4:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
 Type in the desired text to define a title for the field.
FONT
USER

]
]
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the User Text parameter.
The User Text parameter allows you to define a
default text string for the variable text. The default
string will reside in the field until actual usersupplied text is entered, until the pattern is closed,
or until the controller is powered off. See Save in
Query Buffer parameter (below) for more
information on retaining user-supplied text.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
4:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
 Type in the desired text to define the default string.
FONT
USER

]
]
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Clear User parameter.
The Clear User parameter determines how the
system handles the user-supplied data after the
print cycle is complete.
If enabled, the system will clear (delete) the usertext from the field after the pattern prints. If
another print cycle is attempted with the user text
field empty, the system will display an Error screen
stating “ Variable Text Field Not Found”.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
4:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
FONT
USER

]
]
F1 ACCEPT
If disabled, the system keeps the user-text in the
field until it is manually cleared or edited, until the
pattern is closed, or until the controller is powered
off. See Save in Query Buffer parameter (below)
for more information on retaining user-supplied
text.
 Press ENTER to toggle the option OFF or ON.
 indicates the user-supplied text will be cleared.
 indicates the user-supplied text will be retained.
 Press TAB to select the Save in Query Buffer
parameter.
The Save in Query Buffer parameter allows you to
save the user-supplied text in one of the query text
buffers. This retains data when it would normally
be cleared by the system.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
4:
TEXT
Title:
[
User Text: [
Clear user: 
Save in Query buffer :[00]
 Type the number of the query text buffer (01… 20)
where you wish to store the data.
Note: Entering 00 effectively disables the save
feature (i.e., the user-text will not be saved).
FONT
USER

]
]
F1 ACCEPT
82350-
2-29
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3-Point ArcText Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The fourth page contains the Arc parameters.
The Arc parameters define the size of the arc and the
location where the text will begin on the arc. The values in
the Start boxes identify the axis coordinates for the arc text
anchor point. The system uses coordinates from the Center
and End boxes to define a circular path on which it will create
the arc text.
4: 
ARC
TOOL
Center
X:[ 3.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
End
X:[
Y:[
1.50]in
2.00]in
4: 
ARC
TOOL
Center
X:[ 3.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
End
X:[
Y:[
1.50]in
2.00]in
4: 
ARC
TOOL
Center
X:[ 3.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
End
X:[
Y:[
1.50]in
2.00]in
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Start
X:[ 4.50]in
Y:[ 2.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Start X (or Y) parameter.
 Do one of the following to define the arc start point:
 (recommended) Press the JOG key
and use
the Design Jog feature to interactively position
the marker and identify the location.
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis
box.
 Press TAB to select the End X (or Y) parameter. Repeat
the process (above) to define the arc end point.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
 Key Point…
Start
X:[ 4.50]in
Y:[ 2.00]in
The arc text may or may not pass through the
center point of the arc. That depends on whether
the text string is convex or concave. See below.
The arc text may extend beyond the end point, even
overlap the start point, if the text string is longer
than the defined arc.
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Center X (or Y) parameter.
Repeat the process (above) to define the arc center
point.
ARCTEXT(3Point)
Start
X:[ 4.50]in
Y:[ 2.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
2-30
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3-Point ArcText Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The fifth page contains the Tool parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or disable
printing for this arc text string.
4: 
ARCTEXT(3Point)
ARC
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or OFF.
 indicates this arc text string will be printed.
 indicates this arc text string will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
 After all 3-point arc text parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
3-Point ArctText Tips
Consider the following factors when defining 3-point arc text.



Reduce the span of the arc to sharpen (increase) the curvature of the text.

If an arc text string is positioned slightly outside of the marking window, try changing the alignment:
– If the arc text is convex, try changing the Y Just parameter to top or middle alignment.
– If the arc text is concave, try changing the Y Just parameter to bottom or middle alignment.
Increase the span of the arc to flatten (decrease) the curvature of the text.
Experiment with the Start X/Y parameters and the X Just and Y Just parameters.
Slight adjustments of these parameters will reposition the text location along the arc path.
82350-
2-31
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Block Objects
A “block” is a selection of multiple objects in a pattern that are assembled as a group. This group (or block) of objects may
then be saved as a single entity in a block (.BLK) file. Although the TMC470 software does not allow you to assemble (or
disassemble) block files, you can download existing block files to the TMC470 Controller. Once downloaded to the controller,
the block files may be used in patterns that reside in controller memory.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a block object to the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
press F2 (EDIT) then F1: TOOL .
The system will display the TOOL Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
]
]
]
]
]
 Press F4 to select the BLOCK menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
TOOL:
COMMON
GRAPHIC
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Block Editor Screen
for you to define the field. Parameters are shown
on two separate pages (Block and Tool).
2-32
F1:TEXT
001:[
F2:ARC TEXT
002:[
F3:ARC TEXT 3P
003:[
F4:BLOCK
004:[
005:[
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Block Object Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Block parameters.
 Press TAB to select the X (or Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the anchor point of the block
will be placed in the marking window.
The anchor point is defined when the block is first
created. It is important to know where the anchor
point is located relative to the group of objects in
order to properly position the block.
BLOCK
4: BLOCK
X: [
Y: [
0.0000] in
4.0000] in
TOOL
Scale : [
1.0000]
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
Block File: [
F1 ACCEPT
 Do one of the following:
]
F2 FILE SELECT
 Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the start location.
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
 Press TAB to select the Scale parameter.
The Scale parameter allows you to change the size
of the block object without distorting its aspect
ratio (width-to-height ratio).
 Enter the scaling factor in the Scale box.
For example:
0.5000 represents 50% or ½X
1.0000 represents 100% or 1X
2.0000 represents 200% or 2X
BLOCK
4: BLOCK
X: [
Y: [
0.0000] in
4.0000] in
TOOL
Scale : [
1.0000]
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
Block File: [
F1 ACCEPT
]
F2 FILE SELECT
 Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter defines the number of
degrees the block of objects will be rotated around
the anchor point. Angles are measured from 0°
(located at the 3 o'clock position relative to the
anchor point) and increase in a counter-clockwise
direction around the anchor. Note that an angle of
0° indicates no rotation.
BLOCK
4: BLOCK
X: [
Y: [
0.0000] in
4.0000] in
TOOL
Scale : [
1.0000]
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
Block File: [
F1 ACCEPT
]
F2 FILE SELECT
 Enter the desired amount of rotation (in degrees) in
the Angle box.
The block always pivots on its anchor point. The
anchor point is defined when the block is first
created. It is important to know where the anchor
point is located relative to the group of objects. As
you can see, using the same rotation angle with a
different anchor (pivot) point produces very
different results. See illustration.
82350-
2-33
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Block Object Parameters (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Block File parameter.
The Block File parameter allows you identify the
block file stored in controller memory that you
wish to assign to this field.
BLOCK
4: BLOCK
X: [
Y: [
0.0000] in
4.0000] in
TOOL
Scale : [
1.0000]
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
Block File: [
 Press F2 (FILE SELECT).
]
F1 ACCEPT
The system will display the Block Select screen
that lists all block files stored in controller
memory.
F2 FILE SELECT
 From the list provided, find the name of the block file
you wish to use, then press the function key that
corresponds with the desired block.
In this example, press F2 to select the block file
named BLOCK_02.
BLK SELECT
Total 006 Page: 01 of
F1–BLOCK_01
F2–BLOCK_02
F3–BLOCK_03
F4–BLOCK_04
F5–BLOCK_05
Note: If the block file you wish to use is not
shown, press PAGE DOWN to display more
file names.
The system will return to the Block Editor Screen
with the selected file shown in the Block File text
box (e.g., BLOCK_02).
BLOCK
4: BLOCK
X: [
Y: [
0.0000] in
4.0000] in
TOOL
Scale : [
1.0000]
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
Block File: [BLOCK_02
F1 ACCEPT
]
F2 FILE SELECT
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
BLOCK
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this block object.
4: BLOCK
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or OFF.
 indicates this block will be printed.
 indicates this block will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
 After all block object parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
2-34
02
82350-
F2 FILE SELECT
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.2 Arc (Radius Method)
The marking system software constructs a radius arc using a center location and a radius to define a circular path. It also
uses a start angle and an end angle to define where the arc begins and ends along that circular path.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add an arc to the pattern:
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F2 (EDIT) then F1 TOOL.
The system will display the TOOL Menu.
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press Page Down to toggle to the GRAPHIC page.
]
]
]
]
]
FTOOL:
1:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE F4GRAPHIC
:MARKER F5:SETUP
COMMON
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
F1:ARC
F5:BOX
]
F001:[
F6:CIRCLE
2:ARC 3P
]
F002:[
F7:ELLIPSE
3:LINE
]
F003:[
F8:ELLIPSE 3P
4:LINE2P
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F1 ARC to add the arc to the pattern.
The system will display the Arc Editor Screen for
you to define the radius arc. The parameters are
displayed on two pages (Arc and Tool).
The first page contains the Arc parameters.
 Press TAB to select the X (or Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the center of the arc will be
anchored in the marking window.
 Do one of the following:
ARC
4:
ARC
X: [
Y: [
6.0000]in
3.0000]in
TOOL
Radius: [ 1.0000]in
Start: [ 0.0000]°
End : [359.000]°
 Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the center location.
F1 ACCEPT
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
82350-
2-35
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Radius Arc Parameters (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Radius parameter.
The Radius parameter defines the size of the arc.
The system constructs a circular path using the
anchor point and radius that you specified. See
illustration.
Ensure the radius is not so large that it will position
the arc outside the available marking window.
ARC
4:
ARC
X: [
Y: [
3.0000]in
2.0000]in
TOOL
Radius: [ 1.0000]in
Start: [ 0.0000]°
End : [359.000]°
 Type the desired radius in the box.
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Start parameter.
The Start and End parameters define where the arc
will begin and end on the circular path. See
illustration.
Angular measurements around the anchor point
begin at the 3 o’clock position (0°) and increase in
the counter-clockwise direction. See illustration.
4:
ARC
X: [
Y: [
3.0000]in
2.0000]in
TOOL
Radius: [ 1.0000]in
Start: [ 0.0000]°
End : [359.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
 Key Point…
The relative location of the start and end points
determine whether the arc is convex or concave. The
software always constructs arcs in a counter-clockwise
(CCW) direction from the start point.
 Type the Start angle to identify where the arc will start.
 Press TAB to select the End parameter.
 Type the End angle to identify where the arc will end.
2-36
ARC
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Radius Arc Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
ARC
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this arc.
4:
ARC
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
 indicates this arc will be printed.
 indicates this arc will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
 After all radius arc parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
82350-
2-37
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.3 Arc 3P (3-point Method)
The marking system software constructs a 3-point arc using a start point, a center point, and an end point to define a
circular path that encompasses all three points. This method of arc construction is simplified when used with the Design Jog
feature to interactively identify the three points.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a 3-point arc to the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
F2 (EDIT) then F1 TOOL.
The system will display the TOOL Menu.
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press Page down to toggle to the GRAPHIC page.
]
]
]
]
]
FTOOL:
1:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE F4GRAPHIC
:MARKER F5:SETUP
COMMON
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 Press F2 ARC 3P to add the arc to the pattern.
The system will display the Arc 3P Editor Screen for
you to define the 3-point arc. The parameters are
displayed on two pages (Arc 3P and Tool).
F1:ARC
001:[
F
2:ARC 3P
002:[
F
3:LINE
003:[
F
4:LINE2P
004:[
005:[
F5:BOX
F6:CIRCLE
F7:ELLIPSE
F8:ELLIPSE 3P
]
]
]
]
]
The first page contains the Arc 3P parameters.
The values in the Start boxes identify the axis coordinates
in the marking window where the arc will begin. The End
boxes identify where the arc will terminate. The Center
boxes identify the midpoint of the arc. The system uses
these three locations to define a circular path on which it
will create the arc.
ARC 3P
Start
X:[ 4.50]in
Y:[ 2.00]in
 Key Point…
ARC 3P
TOOL
Center
X:[ 3.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
The relative location of the start and end points
determine whether the arc is convex or concave.
The software always constructs arcs in a counterclockwise (CCW) direction from the start point.
The center point is used to define the circular path,
not necessarily the arc itself. Accordingly, the arc
may or may not pass through the center point,
depending on the shape of the arc.
Note that the start, center, and end points must not
be located in the same horizontal or vertical line.
Doing so would result in an undefined circular path.
2-38
4:
82350-
End
X:[
Y:[
1.50]in
2.00]in
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3-Point Arc Parameters (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Start X (or Y) parameter.
 Do one of the following to define the arc start point:
ARC 3P
 (recommended) Press the JOG key
and use
the Design Jog feature to interactively position
the marker and identify the location.
4:
Start
X:[ 4.50]in
Y:[ 2.00]in
ARC 3P
TOOL
Center
X:[ 3.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
End
X:[
Y:[
1.50]in
2.00]in
End
X:[
Y:[
1.50]in
2.00]in
End
X:[
Y:[
1.50]in
2.00]in
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis
F1 ACCEPT
box.
ARC 3P
4:
Start
X:[ 4.50]in
Y:[ 2.00]in
 Press TAB to select the End X (or Y) parameter.
Repeat the process (above) to define the arc end
point.
ARC 3P
TOOL
Center
X:[ 3.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Center X (or Y) parameter.
ARC 3P
Repeat the process (above) to define the arc center
point.
4:
Start
X:[ 4.50]in
Y:[ 2.00]in
ARC 3P
TOOL
Center
X:[ 3.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this arc.
ARC 3P
4:
ARC 3P
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
 indicates this arc will be printed.
 indicates this arc will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
 After all 3-point arc parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
82350-
2-39
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.6 Line (Start Method)
The Line tool allows you to add a simple line segment to the pattern. The system constructs the line using a start location,
an angular direction, and a distance dimension.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a line to the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT) then F1 TOOL.
The system will display the TOOL Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
F2:COMMAND
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
 Press Page Down to toggle the Graphic page
F1:FILE
F3:MACHINE F4GRAPHIC
:MARKER F5:SETUP
TOOL: F2:EDIT
COMMON
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 Press F3 LINE to add the line to the pattern.
The system will display the Line Editor Screen for
you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (Line and Tool).
2-40
F1:ARC
001:[
F2:ARC 3P
002:[
F3:LINE
003:[
F4:LINE2P
004:[
005:[
82350-
F5:BOX
F6:CIRCLE
F7:ELLIPSE
F8:ELLIPSE 3P
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Line Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Line parameters.
 Press TAB to select the X (or Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the line will start in the marking
window.
LINE
4:
LINE
X: [
Y: [
0.0000]in
4.0000]in
TOOL
Length: [ 1.0000]in
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
 Do one of the following:
 Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the anchor location.
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis
box.
 Press TAB to select the Length parameter.
The Length parameter defines the outward distance
of the line from the start point
 Enter the line length in the Length box.
LINE
4:
LINE
X: [
Y: [
0.0000]in
4.0000]in
TOOL
Length: [ 1.0000]in
Angle: [ 0.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter defines the direction of the line
from the start point. Angles are measured from 0°
(parallel to the X-axis) and increase in a counterclockwise direction. See illustration.
LINE
4:
LINE
X: [
Y: [
0.0000]in
4.0000]in
TOOL
Length: [ 1.0000]in
Angle: [ 0.000]°
 Enter the desired direction of the line (in degrees) in
the Angle box.
F1 ACCEPT
82350-
2-41
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Line Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this line.
LINE
4:
LINE
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or OFF.
 indicates this line will be printed.
 indicates this line will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
 After all line parameters are defined, press F1
(ACCEPT) to save the settings.
2-42
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.7 Line 2P (Start/End Method)
The Line 2P tool allows you to add a 2-point line segment to the pattern. The system constructs the line using a start
location and an end location to define the line length and direction.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a line to the pattern specifying a start and end
point:
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
F2:COMMAND
001:[
]
F3:CUT
002:[
]
F4:COPY
003:[
]
F5:PASTE
004:[
]
F6:ADJUST
005:[
]
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F2 (EDIT) then F1 TOOL.
The system will display the TOOL Menu.
 Press Page Down to toggle the GRAPHIC page.
 Press F4 LINE 2P to add the line to the pattern.
F1:FILE
F3:MACHINE FGRAPHIC
4:MARKER F5:SETUP
TOOL:F2:EDIT
COMMON
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Line 2P Editor Screen for
you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (Line2P and Tool).
F1:ARC
001:[
F2:ARC 3P
002:[
F3:LINE
003:[
F4:LINE2P
004:[
005:[
82350-
F5:BOX
F6:CIRCLE
F7:ELLIPSE
F8:ELLIPSE 3P
]
]
]
]
]
2-43
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Line 2P Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Line2P parameters.
 Press TAB to select the Start X (or Start Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the line will start in the marking
window.
LINE 2P
4:
Start
X:[ 0.0000]in
Y:[ 4.0000]in
LINE2P
TOOL
End
X:[
Y:[
0.0000]in
4.0000]in
F1 ACCEPT
 Do one of the following:
 Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the start location.
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis
box.
 Press TAB to select the End X (or End Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the line will end in the marking
window.
LINE 2P
4:
Start
X:[ 0.0000]in
Y:[ 4.0000]in
 Do one of the following:
 Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the end location.
LINE2P
TOOL
End
X:[
Y:[
0.0000]in
4.0000]in
F1 ACCEPT
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
LINE 2P
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this line.
4:
LINE2P
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
 indicates this line will be printed.
 indicates this line will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
 After all line parameters are defined, press F1
(ACCEPT) to save the settings.
2-44
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.8 Box
The Box tool allows you to add rectangular objects to your pattern. The system constructs a box using a start point, a
height dimension, and a width dimension. The anchor point for a box is always its left, bottom corner.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a box to the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
press F2 (EDIT) then F1 TOOL
The system will display the Tool Menu.
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
 Press Page Down to toggle to the GRAPHIC page
FTOOL:
1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
COMMON
GRAPHIC
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 Press F5 BOX to add the box to the pattern.
The system will display the Box Editor Screen for
you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (Box and Tool).
F1:ARC
F001:[
2:ARC 3P
F002:[
3:LINE
F003:[
4:LINE2P
004:[
005:[
F5:BOX
F6:CIRCLE
F7:ELLIPSE
F8:ELLIPSE 3P
]
]
]
]
]
The first page contains the Box parameters.
 Press TAB to select the X (or Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the lower, left corner of the
rectangle will be placed in the marking window.
 Do one of the following:
 Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the start location.
BOX
4:
BOX
X: [
Y: [
1.5000] in
1.0000] in
TOOL
Width : [ 1.000]in
Height: [ 1.000]in
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
F1 ACCEPT
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis
box.
82350-
2-45
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Box Parameters (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Width parameter.
The Width parameter (along with the Height
parameter, below) defines the size of the box.
 Enter the width dimension in the Width box.
BOX
4:
BOX
X: [
Y: [
1.5000] in
1.0000] in
TOOL
Width : [ 1.000]in
Height: [ 1.000]in
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
The Height parameter (along with the Width
parameter, above) defines the size of the box.
 Enter the height dimension in the Height box.
BOX
4:
BOX
X: [
Y: [
1.5000] in
1.0000] in
TOOL
Width : [ 1.000]in
Height: [ 1.000]in
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter allows you to rotate the box
in a counterclockwise direction. Note that an angle
of 0° indicates no rotation. See illustration.
 Enter the desired amount of rotation (in degrees) in
the Angle box.
The box always pivots on its lower, left corner.
Angles are measured from 0° (no rotation) and
increase in a counter-clockwise direction. See
illustration (above)
2-46
BOX
4:
BOX
X: [
Y: [
1.5000] in
1.0000] in
TOOL
Width : [ 1.000]in
Height: [ 1.000]in
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
F1 ACCEPT
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Box Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
BOX
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this box.
4:
BOX
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or OFF.
F1 ACCEPT
 indicates this box will be printed.
 indicates this box will not be printed.
 After all box parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
82350-
2-47
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.9 Circle
The Circle tool allows you to add symmetrical, ring-shaped objects to your pattern. The system constructs a circle using a
start point and a radius dimension. The anchor point for a circle is always its center point.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a circle to the pattern:
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT) then F1 TOOL.
The system will display the TOOL Menu.
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
 Press Page Down to toggle to the GRAPHIC page
FTOOL:
1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
COMMON
GRAPHIC
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 Press F6 CIRCLE to add the circle to the pattern.
The system will display the Circle Editor Screen for
you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (Circle and Tool).
F1:ARC
F001:[
2:ARC 3P
F002:[
3:LINE
F003:[
4:LINE2P
004:[
005:[
F5:BOX
F6:CIRCLE
F7:ELLIPSE
F8:ELLIPSE 3P
]
]
]
]
]
The first page contains the Circle parameters.
 Press TAB to select the X (or Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the center of the circle will be
anchored in the marking window.
CIRCLE
4:
CIRCLE
X: [
Y: [
0.0000]in
4.0000]in
TOOL
Radius: [ 1.0000]in
 Do one of the following:
 Press the JOG key
F1 ACCEPT
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the center location.
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
2-48
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Circle Parameters (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Radius parameter.
The Radius parameter defines the size of the circle.
The system constructs a circular path using the
anchor point and radius that you specified. See
illustration.
Ensure the radius is not so large that it will
position the circle outside the available marking
window.
CIRCLE
4:
CIRCLE
X: [
Y: [
0.0000]in
4.0000]in
TOOL
Radius: [ 1.0000]in
F1 ACCEPT
 Type the desired radius in the box.
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter. If
not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this circle.
CIRCLE
4:
CIRCLE
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
 indicates this circle will be printed.
 indicates this circle will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
 After all circle parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
82350-
2-49
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.10 Ellipse (Radius Method)
The Ellipse tool allows you to add oval objects to your pattern. The marking system software provides two ways to create an
ellipse: the radius method and the 3-point method. The system constructs a radius ellipse using a center point, a start
angle, a major radius, and a minor radius. The start angle defines the direction the major radius is drawn from the center
point. The elliptical path is always constructed in a counter-clockwise direction relative to the major radius. Optionally,
elliptical arcs may be created along the elliptical path so that only a portion of the ellipse is printed. The Start and End
parameters define where the arc begins and ends on the elliptical path.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add an ellipse to the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
press F2 (EDIT) then F1 TOOL.
The system will display the TOOL Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
]
]
]
]
]
 Press Page Down to toggle the GRAPHIC page.
F1TOOL:
:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE FGRAPHIC
4:MARKER F5:SETUP
COMMON
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
F1:ARC
F5:BOX
001:[
]
F2:ARC 3P
F6:CIRCLE
002:[
]
F3:LINE
F7:ELLIPSE
003:[
]
F4:LINE2P
F8:ELLIPSE 3P
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F7 ELLIPSE to add the ellipse to the pattern.
The system will display the Ellipse Editor Screen
for you to define the field. The parameters are
displayed on three separate pages (Ellipse,
Common, and Tool).
2-50
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Radius Ellipse Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Ellipse parameters.
 Press TAB to select the X (or Y) parameter.
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates where the center of the elliptical path
will be anchored in the marking window.
ELLIPSE
X:[
Y:[
 Do one of the following:
4:
3.0000]in
2.0000]in
ELLIPSE
COMMON
Major Radius:[
Minor Radius:[
TOOL
1.00]in
1.00]in
 Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the center location.
F1 ACCEPT
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis
box.
 Press TAB to select the Major Radius parameter.
ELLIPSE
The Major Radius defines the widest part of the
ellipse. See illustration.
Ensure the major radius is not so large that it will
position the ellipse outside the available marking
window.
X:[
Y:[
4:
3.0000]in
2.0000]in
 Type the desired dimension in the Major Radius box.
ELLIPSE
COMMON
Major Radius:[
Minor Radius:[
TOOL
1.00]in
1.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Minor Radius parameter.
The Minor Radius defines the narrower diameter of
the ellipse. The minor radius is always
perpendicular to the major radius (widest part) of
the ellipse. See illustration.
Ensure the minor radius is not so large that it will
position the ellipse outside the available marking
window.
ELLIPSE
X:[
Y:[
4:
3.0000]in
2.0000]in
ELLIPSE
COMMON
Major Radius:[
Minor Radius:[
TOOL
1.00]in
1.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
 Type the desired dimension in the Minor Radius box.
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
82350-
2-51
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Radius Ellipse Parameters (continued)
The second page contains the Common parameters.
These parameters allow you to rotate the ellipse and to define whether the ellipse is a complete oval or partial oval (an
elliptical arc).
 Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter allows you to rotate the ellipse
counter-clockwise around its center point. The Angle
parameter defines the number of degrees the major
diameter will be rotated relative to the X-axis. Note
that 0° indicates no rotation. See illustration.
ELLIPSE
4:
ELLIPSE
COMMON
TOOL
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
 Enter the desired rotation (in degrees) in the Angle box.
Start: [ 0.000]°
End : [360.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
 Key Point…
The origin is that point where the major diameter intersects
the ellipse at the 3 o’clock position relative to the ellipse
center point. Note that the origin stays at the same relative
location on the ellipse as it is rotated.
If you wish to print only a portion of the ellipse the Start and
End parameters allow you to define the beginning and end of
an elliptical arc.
 Press TAB to select the Start parameter.
The Start parameter defines the start angle,
relative to the center point and the origin. See
illustration below. The arc will begin where the start
angle intersects the elliptical path.
ELLIPSE
ELLIPSE
COMMON
Angle: [ 0.0000]°
Start: [ 0.000]°
End : [360.000]°
 Enter the start angle (in degrees) in the Start box.
 Press TAB to select the End parameter.
F1 ACCEPT
The End parameter defines the end angle, relative
to the center point and origin. See illustration. The
arc will end where the end angle intersects the
elliptical path.
 Enter the end angle (in degrees) in the End
box.
Radius Ellipse Parameters (continued)
2-52
4:
82350-
TOOL
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The third page contains the Tool parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this ellipse.
ELLIPSE
4:
ELLIPSE
COMMON
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or OFF.
 indicates this ellipse will be printed.
 indicates this ellipse will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
 After all radius ellipse parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
82350-
2-53
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.11 Ellipse 3P (3-point Method)
The Ellipse 3P tool allows you to add oval objects to your pattern. The marking system software provides two ways to
create an ellipse: the 3-point method and the radius method. The system constructs a 3-point ellipse using a start point
and an end point to define the major diameter of the ellipse. The middle point helps to define the minor diameter. The
elliptical path is always constructed in a counter-clockwise direction from the start point. Optionally, elliptical arcs may be
created along the elliptical path so that only a portion of the ellipse is printed. The Start and End parameters define where
the arc begins and ends on the elliptical path.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a 3-point ellipse to the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
press F2 (EDIT) then press F1.
The system will display the TOOL Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
]
]
]
]
]
 Press Page Down to toggle the GRAPHIC page
F1:FILE
F3:MACHINE FGRAPHIC
4:MARKER F5:SETUP
TOOL: F2:EDIT
COMMON
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 Press F8 ELLIPSE 3P to add the ellipse to the
pattern.
The system will display the Ellipse 3P Editor
Screen for you to define the field. The parameters
are displayed on three separate pages (Ellipse,
Common, and Tool).
2-54
F1:ARC
001:[
F2:ARC 3P
002:[
F3:LINE
003:[
F4:LINE2P
004:[
005:[
82350-
F5:BOX
F6:CIRCLE
F7:ELLIPSE
F8:ELLIPSE 3P
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3-Point Ellipse Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Ellipse 3P parameters.
 Press TAB to select the Start X (or Y) parameter.
The Start parameters define where the ellipse will
begin.
 Do one of the following to define the ellipse start
point:
 (recommended) Press the JOG key
and use
the Design Jog feature to interactively position the
marker and identify the location.
ELLIPSE-3P
4:
ELLIPSE
Start
X:[ 4.50]in
Y:[ 2.00]in
Center
X:[ 3.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
COMMON
End
X:[
Y:[
TOOL
1.50]in
2.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis box.
 Press TAB to select the End X (or Y) parameter.
Repeat the process (above) to define the ellipse end
point.
The End parameters define where the ellipse will
terminate. This point, relative to the start point,
determines the major diameter (wider diameter)
and the angular orientation of the ellipse.
Remember... The system constructs three-point
arcs from the start point through the end point in a
counter-clockwise direction.
ELLIPSE-3P
4:
ELLIPSE
Start
X:[ 4.50]in
Y:[ 2.00]in
Center
X:[ 3.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
COMMON
End
X:[
Y:[
TOOL
1.50]in
2.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Center X (or Y) parameter.
Repeat the process (above) to define the ellipse
center point.
The Center parameters help to define the elliptical
path. The system uses this point, relative to the
start and end points, to determine the minor
diameter (narrower diameter) of the ellipse. The
mid-point must reside on an imaginary ellipse
passing through both the start point and end point.
Remember... The system constructs three-point
ellipses from the start point through the end point
in a counter-clockwise direction.
ELLIPSE-3P
4:
ELLIPSE
Start
X:[ 4.50]in
Y:[ 2.00]in
Center
X:[ 3.00]in
Y:[ 3.00]in
COMMON
End
X:[
Y:[
TOOL
1.50]in
2.00]in
F1 ACCEPT
82350-
2-55
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3-Point Ellipse Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Common parameters.
These parameters allow you to rotate the ellipse and to define whether the ellipse is a complete oval or partial oval (an
elliptical arc).
 Press TAB to select the Angle parameter.
The Angle parameter allows you to rotate the
ellipse counter-clockwise around is center point. It
defines the number of degrees the major diameter
will be rotated relative to its initial orientation.
 Enter the desired rotation (in degrees) in the Angle
ELLIPSE-3P
4:
ELLIPSE
Angle:
[ 0.0000]°
Start:
End :
[ 0.000]°
[360.000]°
COMMON
TOOL
COMMON
TOOL
box.
F1 ACCEPT
 Key Point…
The ellipse initial orientation may be
rotated due to its construction (i.e.,
the relative location of the Start and
End points). See illustration. The Angle
parameter rotates each ellipse based
on its initial orientation.
The origin is that point located where
the major diameter intersects the
ellipse at the 3 o’clock position relative
to the ellipse center point. Note that
the origin stays at the same relative
location on the ellipse as it is rotated.
If you wish to print only a portion of the ellipse the Start
and End parameters allow you to define the beginning
and end of an elliptical arc.
 Press TAB to select the Start parameter.
The Start parameter defines the start angle,
relative to the center point and the origin. See
illustration below. The arc will begin where the
start angle intersects the elliptical path.
4:
ELLIPSE
Angle:
[ 0.0000]°
Start:
End :
[ 0.000]°
[360.000]°
F1 ACCEPT
 Enter the start angle (in degrees) in the
Start box.
 Press TAB to select the End parameter.
The End parameter defines the end
angle, relative to the center point and
the origin. See illustration. The arc will
end where the end angle intersects the
elliptical path.
 Enter the end angle (in degrees) in the
End box.
2-56
ELLIPSE-3P
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3-Point Ellipse Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The third page contains the Tool parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable printing for this ellipse.
ELLIPSE-3P
4:
ELLIPSE
COMMON
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
OFF.
 indicates this ellipse will be printed.
 indicates this ellipse will not be printed.
F1 ACCEPT
 After all 3-point ellipse parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
82350-
2-57
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.13 GoTo Command
You can design your patterns to include a GoTo field. When a GoTo field is encountered, the machine will move from its
current location to the new location defined by the field. This is useful when you need to move the machine around
obstacles in the marking window. No marking is performed by the GoTo field — only movement.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
Before you begin editing the pattern, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the field location.
See Design Considerations for details. If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take
a few minutes and review that section for an overview of key design concepts.
To add a GoTo command to the pattern:
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT) then press F2 COMMAND.
The system will display the Command Menu.
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F1COMMAND
:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
F1:GOTO
F5:SERIAL
001:[
]
F2:PAUSE
F6:MACHINE
002:[
]
F3:INPUT
003:[
]
F4:OUTPUT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F1 GOTO to add the GoTo command to the
pattern.
The system will display the GoTo Editor Screen for
you to define the command. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (GoTo and Tool).
The first page contains the GoTo parameters.
These parameters define the axis coordinate(s) where the
marker will reposition when the GoTo command is
encountered in the pattern and the order in which the
system will move each axis.
GOTO
4:
GOTO
X: [
Y: [
0.0000]in
0.0000]in
TOOL
 Press TAB to select the X (or Y) parameter.
 Do one of the following to define the coordinates:
F1 ACCEPT
 (recommended) Press the JOG key
and use
the Design Jog feature to interactively position
the marker and identify the location.
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each axis
box.
2-58
]
]
]
]
]
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
GoTo Command Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Tool parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Printable parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Printable parameter allows you enable or
disable the execution of this GoTo command.
There may be times when you wish to use (or not
use) the GoTo command in your pattern. Rather
deleting and recreating the command each time,
you can simply toggle its usage on or off.
GOTO
4:
GOTO
TOOL
Printable: 
 Press ENTER to toggle the printable option ON or
F1 ACCEPT
OFF.
 indicates this GoTo will be executed.
 indicates this GoTo command will not be executed.
 After all GoTo command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
82350-
2-59
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.14 Pause Command
You can program the marking system to pause during the printing cycle by including a Pause command in the pattern. The
Pause command will suspend marking operation until the system receives another Start Print command or until the
programmable time delay expires.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
NOTICE
When you add a Pause command to the pattern, the system automatically
places it at the end of the list of fields already defined. You may wish to move
the Pause command to a location in the list where it will be most effective. See
Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
To add a Pause command to the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
press F2 (EDIT) then press F2 COMMAND.
The system will display the Command Menu.
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press F2 PAUSE to add the Pause command to the
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
COMMAND
DESN
–Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
pattern.
The system will display the Pause Editor Screen for
you to define the command. The parameters are
displayed on two separate pages (Pause and
Instruction).
F1:GOTO
001:[
F2:PAUSE
002:[
F3:INPUT
003:[
F4:OUTPUT
004:[
F5:SERIAL
F6:MACHINE
005:[
The first page contains the Pause parameters.
These parameters define how long the marker will remain
paused after the Pause command is executed.
 Verify the cursor is on the Mode parameter.
PAUSE
If not, press TAB to select it.
Start Print forces the marker to pause the printing
cycle until it receives another explicit print
command. This feature may be useful if you want
to print part of a pattern, reposition the part, then
resume printing the remaining fields. The Start
Print may be initiated by the operator or by a
remote input device.
Mode:
4:
PAUSE
INSTRUCT
Start Print 
Delay 
Time Delay: [00000 ]ms
F1 ACCEPT
Delay programs the system to pause for a specific
length of time. This feature may be useful in
automated applications where other processes
occur during the print cycle (e.g., clamping,
moving, turning, etc.).
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the desired Pause mode, then press ENTER.
2-60
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Pause Command Parameters (continued)
 If you selected Delay mode, press TAB to select the
Time Delay parameter.
PAUSE
 Type the time delay (in milliseconds) in the Time
Mode:
Delay text box. The system will automatically
resume printing after the specified time.
4:
PAUSE
INSTRUCT
Start Print 
Delay 
Time Delay: [00000 ]ms
F1 ACCEPT
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Instruction parameter.
 Verify the cursor is on the Instructions parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Instructions parameter allows you to define a
message that will be displayed to the operator
while the marker is paused. You might wish to
include notes, comments, or special instructions
related to the pause interval. The displayed
message will be removed from the screen when
operation resumes.
PAUSE
4:
PAUSE
INSTRUCT
Instructions: [
]
F1 ACCEPT
 Type the appropriate message in the Instructions
text box.
Note: You can force the system to display a second
line by adding \N to the instruction text.
For example, if you enter the instruction text as:
This is a test! \N T esting 12345
The system will display the following instructions when
the Pause command is processed:
This is a Test!
Testing 12345
Note: Later, if you wish to remove instructions, be sure to delete all characters from the Instructions text box,
including spaces and line breaks. If any non-printable characters are left in the text box, the system will display
a blank Instructions window during the Pause interval.
 After all Pause command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
 Key Point…
When you add a Pause command to the pattern, the system automatically places it at the end of the list of fields
already defined. You may wish to move the Pause command to a location in the list where it will be most effective. See
Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
82350-
2-61
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.15 Input Command
You can design your patterns to check the status of the marking system spare input signals and have the software respond
accordingly. This allows the TMC470 to emulate a Programmable Logic Controller (PLC) by controlling when and how the
system responds to the signals.
When the system encounters an Input command during the print cycle, it compares the state of the input signals with the
Input command parameter values. If the actual signal states match their parameters, the system continues with the print
cycle without interruption. If any signal state does not match its parameters, the system will take the appropriate action as
defined by the Input command instructions.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
NOTICE
When you add an Input command to the pattern, the system automatically
places it at the end of the list of fields already defined. You may wish to move
the Input command to a location in the list where it will be most effective. See
Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
To add an Input command to the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
press F2 (EDIT) then press F2 COMMAND.
The system will display the Command Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press F3 INPUT to add the Input command to the
]
]
]
]
]
F1COMMAND
:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
F1:GOTO
F5:SERIAL
001:[
]
F2:PAUSE
F6:MACHINE
002:[
]
F3:INPUT
003:[
]
F4:OUTPUT
004:[
]
005:[
]
pattern.
The system will display the Input Editor Screen for
you to define the command. The parameters are
displayed on three separate pages (Input,
Condition, and Instruction).
2-62
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Input Command Parameters (continued)
The first page contains the Input parameters.
The system provides three spare input signals: INPUT 11, INPUT 12, and INPUT 13. These signals are received on pins 11,
12, and 13 of the TMC470 I/O Port connector. Refer to the TMC470 Installation & Maintenance Manual for complete I/O
signal specifications.
When an Input command is executed during the print cycle, it polls the status of the spare input signals, compares their
actual signal states with their assigned states, and takes the appropriate action as follows:


If all actual signal states match their assigned states, the system continues the print cycle without interruption.
If any signal state does not match its assigned state, the system takes action as defined by the False Condition
parameter. See below.
NOTICE
The system polls the input signals at the time the Input command is executed
during the print cycle, not at the time the Start Print command is issued.
 Verify the cursor is on the Input 11 line.
If not, press TAB to select it.
OFF – Select OFF if you want the system to proceed
with the print cycle when this signal is in its OFF
state.


If the signal is off when polled, the system
will proceed with the print cycle.
If the signal is on when polled, the system
will execute the task defined by the False
Condition parameter. See below.
INPUT
4:
INPUT
Input 11
Input 12
Input 13
OFF 
OFF 
OFF 
CONDITION
ON 
ON 
ON 
INSTRUCT
DON’T CARE 
DON’T CARE 
DON’T CARE 
F1 ACCEPT
ON – Select ON if you want the system to proceed
with the print cycle when this signal is in its ON
state.


If the signal is on when polled, the system
will proceed with the print cycle.
If the signal is off when polled, the system
will execute the task defined by the False
Condition parameter. See below.
DON’T CARE – Select DON’T CARE (the default) if
you want the system to ignore the signal state. Regardless of the signal state, the system will proceed with the print
cycle.
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the assigned signal state, then press ENTER.
 Repeat the process (above) for the remaining spare input signals (Input 12 and Input 13), as applicable.
82350-
2-63
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Input Command Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page contains the Condition parameters.
The False Condition parameter defines what action the system will take if the actual state of any spare input signal does not
match its assigned state. If all spare input signals match their assigned states, the print cycle will continue without
interruption. If any of signal state does not match its definition, the system can be programmed to respond in one of three
ways.
 Configure one of the following options:
 Wait Condition. The marking system will suspend
operation until the signal state matches its
definition. The amount of time the system will wait
is defined by the Timeout parameter.
 Press TAB to select Wait, then press ENTER.
 Press TAB to move the cursor to the Timeout
text box.
 Type the wait period (in milliseconds) in the
Timeout text box.
Note: If the Timeout parameter is set to 0
(zero), the system will wait
indefinitely for the signal state to
match its definition. Otherwise,
when the timeout period expires,
the system will execute the End
Condition (see below).
 Add instructions for the operator, as
applicable.
See Instructions parameter, below.
INPUT
4:
INPUT
CONDITION
INSTRUCT
False Condition:
Wait  Timeout: [00000 ]ms
End 
Jump  Field: [000 ]
F1 ACCEPT
or
 End Condition. The marking system will end the
INPUT
print cycle and move the machine to its Park
position.
 Press TAB to select End, then press ENTER.
4:
INPUT
CONDITION
INSTRUCT
False Condition:
Wait  Timeout: [00000 ]ms
End 
Jump  Field: [000 ]
or
F1 ACCEPT
 Jump Condition. The marking system will jump to
the specified field in the pattern and then continue
the print cycle.
 Press TAB to select Jump, then press ENTER.
 Press TAB to move the cursor to the Field text
box.
 Type the field number the system should jump
to and continue the print cycle.
INPUT
4:
INPUT
CONDITION
False Condition:
Wait  Timeout: [00000 ]ms
End 
Jump  Field: [000 ]
F1 ACCEPT
2-64
82350-
INSTRUCT
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Input Command Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The third page contains the Instruction parameter.
 Verify the cursor is on the Instructions parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Instructions parameter allows you to define a
message that will be displayed to the operator
while marker operations are suspended during a
timeout. See Wait Condition, above. The displayed
message will be removed from the screen when
operation resumes.
INPUT
4:
INPUT
CONDITION
Instructions: [
INSTRUCT
]
F1 ACCEPT
 Type the appropriate message in the Instructions
text box.
Note: You can force the system to display a
second line by adding \N to the instruction
text.
For example, if you enter the instruction text as:
This is a test! \N T esting 12345
The system will display the following instructions when
the Input command is processed:
This is a Test!
Testing 12345
Note: Later, if you wish to remove instructions, be sure to delete all characters from the Instructions text box,
including spaces and line breaks. If any non-printable characters are left in the text box, the system will display
a blank Instructions window during the Wait Condition interval.
 After all Input command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
82350-
2-65
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.16 Output Command
You can design your patterns to activate the marking system spare output signals during the printing cycle. When the
system encounters an Output command during the print cycle, it sets the spare output signals ON or OFF as defined by the
Output command parameters.
The system provides two spare output signals: OUTPUT 24 and OUTPUT 25. These signals are transmitted from pins 24 and
25 of the TMC470 I/O Port connector. Refer to the TMC470 Installation & Maintenance Manual for complete I/O signal
specifications.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
NOTICE
When you add an Output command to the pattern, the system automatically
places it at the end of the list of fields already defined. You may wish to move
the Output command to a location in the list where it will be most effective.
See Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for
details.
To add an Output command to the pattern:
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F2 (EDIT) then press F2 COMMAND
The system will display the Command Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
]
]
]
]
]
F1COMMAND
:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 Press F4 OUTPUT to add the Output command to the
pattern.
The system will display the Output Editor Screen for
you to define the command.
F1:GOTO
001:[
F2:PAUSE
002:[
F3:INPUT
003:[
F4:OUTPUT
004:[
005:[
F5:SERIAL
F6:MACHINE
]
]
]
]
]
 Verify the cursor is on the Output 24 line.
If not, press TAB to select it.
OFF – Select OFF if you want the system to set the
spare output signal to its off state.
OUTPUT
1 -----------------------------
Output 24
Output 25
OFF 
OFF 
ON 
ON 
ON – Select ON if you want the system to set the
spare output signal to its on state.
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
F1 ACCEPT
appropriate signal state, then press ENTER.
 Repeat the process for spare signal Output 25.
 After all Output command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
2-66
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.17 Serial Command
You can design your patterns to include Serial commands. When executed, the system will transmit a specific message to
an I/O device connected to the Serial2 port of the TMC470 Controller. The system will wait for a response from the I/O
device, then respond according to the Serial command parameters you define.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
In order to add a Serial Command to your pattern, the Serial Tool parameter must be enabled.
Refer to Serial2 Communication Properties (Chapter 3) for details.
NOTICE
When you add a Serial command to the pattern, the system automatically
places it at the end of the list of fields already defined. You may wish to move
the Serial command to a location in the list where it will be most effective. See
Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
To add a Serial command to the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
F2 (EDIT) then F2 COMMAND.
The system will display the Command Menu.
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
 Press F5 SERIAL to add the Serial command to the
pattern.
The system will display the Serial Editor Screen for
you to define the command. The parameters are
displayed on two pages (Message and Condition).
F1COMMAND
:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
F1:GOTO
F5:SERIAL
001:[
]
F2:PAUSE
F6:MACHINE
002:[
]
F3:INPUT
003:[
]
F4:OUTPUT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Verify the cursor is on the Message text box.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Message parameter defines the character string
you wish to transmit to the I/O device.
 Type the text of the message in the Message text box.
You may include message flags to insert real-time
data into the transmitted message. For example,
%C would provide date/timestamp and %13@ would
provide an ASCII carriage return <CR> character.
82350-
SERIAL
4:
MESSAGE
Message
Response
Timeout:
[
[
[05 ] sec
CONDITION
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
2-67
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Serial Command Parameters (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Response text box.
The Response parameter defines the specific character
string that you expect to receive from the I/O device.
If the I/O device returns a valid string, within the allotted
time limit (see Timeout, below), the system will proceed
to the next field in the pattern.
If the I/O device returns an invalid string, the system
will take action as specified by the False Condition
parameter setting. See below.
SERIAL
4:
MESSAGE
Message
Response
Timeout:
[
[
[05 ] sec
CONDITION
]
]
F1 ACCEPT
Note: If you enter nothing in the Response parameter
text box, the system assumes that a response is
not required from the device and it will proceed
to the next field in the pattern.
 Type the expected response in the Response text box.
The Serial2 Communication parameters for
Programmable Protocol govern the Response
message (i.e., Start Character, Ignore Character,
Start Position, Length, and Terminator).
Note: The default settings require an ASCII
carriage return (i.e., decimal 13) at the
end of the message.
 Press TAB to select the Timeout parameter.
The Timeout parameter defines how long the system
will wait (in seconds) for a response. If the I/O
device takes longer than the allotted time to
respond, the system will take action as specified by
the False Condition parameter setting. See below.
 Type the allotted time in the Timeout text box.
SERIAL
4:
MESSAGE
Message
Response
Timeout:
[
[
[05 ] sec
CONDITION
F1 ACCEPT
2-68
82350-
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Serial Command Parameters (continued)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display the Condition Screen.
SERIAL
The False Condition parameters define what action the
system should take when the response from the I/O
device is invalid or if the response period times out
(elapses).
Configure the parameter for one of these conditions:
4:
MESSAGE
CONDITION
False Condition:
Abort 
End 
Jump  Field: [001 ]
 Abort. The system will abort the print cycle and
F1 ACCEPT
place the machine offline.
 Press TAB to select Abort, then press
ENTER.
or
SERIAL
 End. The marking system will end the print cycle
4:
MESSAGE
CONDITION
False Condition:
Abort 
End 
Jump  Field: [001 ]
and move the machine to its Park position.
 Press TAB to select End, then press ENTER.
F1 ACCEPT
or
 Jump. The marking system will jump to the
specified field in the pattern continue the print
cycle.
 Press TAB to select Jump, then press
ENTER.
 Press TAB to move the cursor to the Field
text box.
 Type the field number the system should
jump to and continue the print cycle.
SERIAL
4:
MESSAGE
CONDITION
False Condition:
Abort 
End 
Jump  Field: [001 ]
F1 ACCEPT
 After all Serial command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
82350-
2-69
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.6.18 Machine Command
The Machine command allows you to change certain parameters while printing the pattern. Normally, these parameters are
applied to all objects in the pattern throughout the entire print cycle.
The Machine command allows you to temporarily change parameter values so that objects following the command in the
pattern list will use the alternate settings. You may include as many Machine commands in the pattern as necessary to
change (or reset) the parameters to meet your specific printing needs.
The parameter settings of a Machine command will remain in effect until another Machine command is processed or until
the print cycle terminates. After the pattern prints and the machine parks, the parameter values that where changed by the
Machine command are restored to their original settings.
 Key Point…
Ensure the pattern you wish to edit is open (loaded).
NOTICE
When you add a Machine command to the pattern, the system automatically
places it at the end of the list of fields already defined. You may wish to move
the Machine command to a location in the list where it will be most effective.
See Edit Patterns (Move Fields) for details.
To add a Machine command to the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
 F1–:TOOL
F2 (EDIT) then press F2 COMMAND .
The system will display the Command Menu.
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
]
]
]
]
]
 Press F6 Machine to add the Machine command to the
pattern.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
COMMAND
DESN –Online – Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:000
The system will display the Machine Editor Screen
for you to define the command.
2-70
F1:GOTO
001:[
F2:PAUSE
002:[
F3:INPUT
003:[
F4:OUTPUT
004:[
005:[
82350-
F5:SERIAL
F6:MACHINE
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Machine Command Parameters (continued)
NOTICE
The Machine command speed settings are relative to the system-level (Setup/Marker) speed
settings. For example, if the Setup/Marker Speed Rate is set to 80%, and you set the Machine
command Speed Rate to 70%, then the resulting speed will be 70% of 80% (effectively 56%).
 Verify the cursor is on the Speed Rate parameter.
The system provides a range of acceptable speeds at
which the system can mark to ensure precise character
formation. Within that range, you can adjust the speed
of the marker in 10% increments.
 Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
MACHINE
4:
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.


MARKER
<
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
Higher rates will result in faster marking times.
Slower rates will result in slower marking times,
but will improve the quality of the printed mark.
 Press TAB to select the Max Speed Rate parameter.
The maximum speed is the fastest rate the marker will
use while executing large moves (e.g., those that
require 200 or more steps). This includes non-marking
moves as when Pre-position, Park, and Online
commands are executed.
 Press ENTER to increase the max speed rate.
MACHINE
4:
MARKER
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the max speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.
<
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
 SS3700 Marker Only:
Press TAB to select the End Speed Rate parameter.
The End Speed is the braking speed the marker uses
when it is slowing down.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the end speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 12.5% to 100%.

4:
MARKER
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
 Press ENTER to increase the end speed rate.

MACHINE
Increase the End speed if you notice the marker is
rounding the corners when it marks right angles.
<
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
Decrease the End speed if you notice the marker
overshooting the corners when it marks right angles.
 SS3700 Marker Only:
Press TAB to select the Diagonal Speed Rate parameter.
The Diagonal speed is the rate the marker moves when it
travels in both the X-axis and Y-axis at the same time.
 Press ENTER to increase the diagonal speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the diagonal speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.


Higher rates may result in faster marking times.
MACHINE
4:
MARKER
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
<
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
Slower rates will improve the quality of the printed
mark and produce more accurate diagonal lines.
 After all Machine command parameters are defined, press F1 (ACCEPT) to save the settings.
82350-
2-71
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.7 TEST PATTERNS
You can test patterns to ensure all the fields will print within the boundaries of the marking window. The system software
examines each field in the order they are defined. An error message will be displayed if the system encounters a problem.
 Load the desired pattern.
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F1 (FILE). The system will display the File Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:SAVE
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
 From the File Menu, press F6 (TEST).
The system will check the fields in the pattern and
display a screen similar to one of these.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
TEST RESULT SCREEN
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
Pattern
contains
0 errors.
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text:
ABCDE
003:[
F1–Acknowledge
004:[
This message shows the system found no errors
with the pattern and the pattern may be printed.
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
This message shows that the system found an
error with Field 002. It extends beyond the left
boundary of the marking window. This error
must be corrected in order to print the pattern.
TEST RESULT SCREEN
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
Pattern pixel range error! Field 002
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
Exceeded
Left
boundary!
003:[
]
F1–Acknowledge
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F1 (ACKNOWLEDGE) to return to the Main Screen.
 If an error was discovered:


2-72
Edit the reported field, as required, to position it within the marking window.
Note: Slight changes to its location, alignment, rotation, or character size may correct the problem.
Re-run the test to ensure there are no additional problems with this field, or other fields in the pattern.
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.8 EDIT PATTERNS
You can edit a pattern by changing the pattern parameters or by changing individual fields within the pattern. Additionally,
you can add, copy, insert, and delete fields from the pattern.
2.8.1 Change Pattern Parameters
Certain parameters and options are stored with the pattern. The pattern parameters affect only the currently loaded
pattern. They do not affect other patterns stored in the controller. The pattern parameters may be defined when the pattern
is first created, or you may change them afterward, as necessary. See Configure Pattern Properties for details.
2.8.2 Change Field Parameters
Each field in the pattern is defined by a variety of parameters that control its printed location, appearance, and content. You
can change these parameters to redefine the field and its characteristics whenever necessary.
 Load the desired pattern.
 Place the system in Designer (or Supervisor) mode.
 Press TAB to move the cursor to the field you wish to edit, then press ENTER.
 Edit the field parameters, as applicable.
See Define Objects Patterns for parameter descriptions.
 When finished editing the field, press F1 (ACCEPT).
 (optional) Test the pattern.
 Save the pattern to preserve your edits.
2.8.3 Copy Fields
You may copy an existing field in a pattern, then edit the resulting (new) field to make it unique.
 Load the desired pattern.
 Place the system in Designer (or Supervisor) mode.
 Press TAB to move the cursor to the field you wish to copy.
 Do one of the following:
 Press F2 (EDIT), then press F4 (COPY).
or
 Press CTRL + C (hold the CTRL key and press C).
 Press TAB to move the cursor to where you wish to insert the copied field.
 Do one of the following:
 Press F2 (EDIT), then press F5 (PASTE).
or
 Press CTRL + INS (hold the CTRL key and press INS).
or
 Press CTRL + V (hold the CTRL key and press V).
 With the newly inserted field selected, press ENTER.
 Edit the new field as applicable.
Note: At a minimum, you will need to edit the new field’s X/Y-axis coordinates.
Otherwise it will print in the same location as the field from which it was copied.
 (optional) Test the pattern.
 Save the pattern to preserve your edits.
82350-
2-73
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.8.4 Delete Fields
If you want to remove a field from the pattern:
 Load the desired pattern.
 Place the system in Designer (or Supervisor) mode.
 Press TAB to move the cursor to the field you wish to delete.
 Do one of the following:
 Press F2 (EDIT), then press F3 (CUT).
or
 Press CTRL + X (hold the CTRL key and then press X).
or
 Press CTRL + DEL (hold the CTRL key and press DEL).
 Save the pattern to preserve your edits.
2-74
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.8.5 Move Fields (Change Print Order)
As you add fields to your pattern, the system places them at the end of a sequential list in the order they are created. This
list is displayed on the Main Screen. When the system prints the pattern, it processes each field, one field at a time, in the
order listed.
After your fields are created, you may wish to rearrange the order in which they will be processed. For example, you may
want certain fields to print before others, or you may need a Pause or GoTo command to be executed at a specific time
during the print cycle. You can effectively change the printing order by simply rearranging the fields in the list. The Cut and
Paste tools allow you to move fields up or down the list to redefine the processing order.
 Load the desired pattern.
 Place the system in Designer (or Supervisor) mode.
 Press TAB to move the cursor to the field you wish to move.
 Do one of the following:
 Press F2 (EDIT), then press F3 (CUT).
or
 Press CTRL + X (hold the CTRL key and then press X).
or
 Press CTRL + DEL (hold the CTRL key and press DEL).
 Press TAB to move the cursor to where you wish the field to reside in the list.
 Do one of the following:
 Press F2 (EDIT), then press F5 (PASTE).
or
 Press CTRL + INS (hold the CTRL key and press INS).
or
 Press CTRL + V (hold the CTRL key and press V).
 Save the pattern to preserve your edits.
82350-
2-75
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.8.6 Adjusting the Pattern Anchor
Suppose you’ve already defined the fields in your pattern and discover they all need to be relocated. Maybe you are
satisfied with their relative layout, but they all need to be shifted (up, down, left, or right) by the same amount. You could
edit each field to redefine its X- and Y-axis coordinates, or you could simply adjust the pattern and let the system software
do the work for you.
When you adjust the pattern, the system will move the first field of the pattern to the new location that you specify. It will
also move all other fields by the same amount. This effectively lets you treat all of the fields as a group so that when they
are moved (adjusted), they maintain their position relative to each other.
2-76
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Adjusting the Pattern Anchor (continued)
To adjust the pattern anchor:
 Load the pattern you wish to adjust.
 Place the system in Designer (or Supervisor) mode.
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F2 (EDIT).
The system will display the Edit Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Online
Pattern:SAMPLE_05
:003
 F1–:TOOL
 From the Edit Menu, press F6 (ADJUST).
001:[TEXT:
002:[TEXT:
003:[TEXT:
004:[
005:[
The system will display the Pattern Adjust Screen.
The Pattern Adjust Screen shows the X/Y axis
coordinates where the first tool in the pattern is
anchored. These coordinates are relative to the
marking window origin (0,0).
F2:COMMAND
F3:CUT
F4:COPY
F5:PASTE
F6:ADJUST
0]
3]
3]
]
]
 Verify the cursor is on the Anchor X parameter.
-------------Pattern Adjust--------------
 Enter the X-axis coordinate where you wish to move
First Tool Anchor X: [
First Tool Anchor Y: [
If not, press TAB to select it.
0.0000]in
0.0000]in
the first tool in the pattern.
 Press TAB to select the Anchor Y parameter.
F1 ACCEPT
 Enter the Y-axis coordinate where you wish to move
the first tool in the pattern.
-------------Pattern Adjust--------------
 Press F1 (ACCEPT) to adjust the pattern anchor.
First Tool Anchor X: [
First Tool Anchor Y: [
The system will move the first tool in the pattern
and anchor it at the new location, as specified.
The system will automatically adjust the locations
of all other fields in the pattern by the same
amount
as the first tool.
0.0000]in
0.0000]in
F1 ACCEPT
82350-
2-77
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.9 CONFIGURE PATTERN PROPERTIES
Certain parameters and options are defined and stored with the pattern. Unlike system parameters that affect all patterns
and all operations, the pattern parameters affect only the currently loaded pattern. They do not affect other patterns stored
in the controller. The pattern parameters may be defined when the pattern is first created or you may change them
afterward, as necessary. Pattern parameters are used to:





configure the pattern serial number
define the park position
define default text parameters
define pattern instructions
define X/Y-axis speed parameters
2.9.1 Pattern Serial Number
A pattern serial number is stored with the pattern parameters and applies only to the pattern in which it resides. Unlike the
Omni serial number which is a system parameter stored in permanent memory, the pattern serial number is independent of
other patterns’ serial numbers.
The pattern serial number is marked each time a text string containing a pattern serial number flag (%S) is printed. The
pattern serial number may be set to increment each time the pattern is printed, or after each field containing a pattern
serial number is printed. When the serial number upper limit is reached, pattern serial numbers may be set to wrap (reset)
or may be set to suspend (halt) printing operations until you take action to reset the number. See Codes and Real-time
Data for details on using the pattern serial number flag in your patterns.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To configure the pattern serial number:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F1 (FILE).
The system will display the File menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:OPEN
 From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
F2:NEW
*001:[TEXT:
F3:SAVE User Text:
002:[TEXT:
F4:SAVE-ASFixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
The system will display the Pattern properties
screen. The first page shows the pattern SN
parameters.
]
]
]
]
]
 Verify the cursor is on the SN parameter. If not,
press TAB to select it.
The SN (serial number) parameter shows the
current serial number value. This value indicates
the next serial number to be marked in the field
(or fields) containing a pattern serial number flag
(%S).
You can manually change the current pattern
serial number at any time by editing this
parameter.
PATTERN:
PARK
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP 
HALT 
DEFAULTS
82350-
INSTRUCT 
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN 
FIELD 
F1 ACCEPT
 Enter the desired value in the SN box.
2-78
SN
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Pattern Serial Number (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Delta parameter.
The Delta parameter defines the amount the serial
number will be changed when its value is
automatically updated by the system.
PATTERN:

PARK
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP 
HALT 
 Enter the desired value in the Delta box.

SN
Enter a positive value for the system to
automatically increase the serial number.
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT 
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN 
FIELD 
F1 ACCEPT
Enter a negative value for the system to
automatically decrease the serial number.
 Press TAB to select the Lower parameter.
PATTERN:
The Lower parameter defines the smallest allowable
serial number.
SN
PARK
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP 
HALT 
 Enter the desired value in the Lower box.
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT 
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN 
FIELD 
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Upper parameter.
The Upper parameter defines the largest allowable
serial number.
PATTERN:
SN
PARK
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP 
HALT 
 Enter the desired value in the Upper box.
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT 
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN 
FIELD 
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Mode parameter.
The Mode parameter defines what action the
system will take when the serial number upper (or
lower) limit is reached.
PATTERN:
SN
PARK
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP 
HALT 
Wrap will automatically reset the serial number
and the system will continue printing.
Note: If the Delta parameter value (see above)
is positive, the serial number will reset to
its lower limit. If the Delta value is
negative, the serial number will reset to
its upper limit.
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT 
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN 
FIELD 
F1 ACCEPT
Halt will temporarily suspend printing operations.
After the marker halts, you must either load a new
pattern or manually reset the SN parameter value.
 Use the UP or DOWN ARROW key to select the desired mode setting, then press ENTER.
82350-
2-79
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Pattern Serial Number (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Increment parameter.
The Increment parameter defines when the system
will update the pattern serial number.
PATTERN:
Pattern will update the serial number after the
marker prints the entire pattern. This allows a
pattern containing multiple serial number flags to
print the same serial number in each field.
SN
:[000000001]
Lower:[000000001]
Mode: WRAP 
HALT 
Field will update the serial number after the
marker prints each field containing a serial number
flag. This allows a pattern containing multiple
serial number flags to print a different serial
number in each field.
SN
PARK
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT 
Delta:[
1]
Upper:[000999999]
Increment: PATTERN 
FIELD 
F1 ACCEPT
 Use the UP or DOWN ARROW key to select the desired mode setting, then press ENTER.
Note: Ensure the SN parameter value is valid (between the Lower and Upper limit settings) before you exit this page.
Otherwise, the system will issue an error message if you attempt to save the settings or display a different
page with an invalid serial number value.
 To SAVE the pattern serial number settings, press F1 (ACCEPT).
 To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.
2-80
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.9.2 Pattern Park Position
Each pattern has a Park position. It defines where the marker will move when the print cycle completes or when a Park
command is issued by the operator. The Park position is programmable. It is often set to move the marking pin out of the
way for easy removal and installation of parts being marked. The Park position may be different for each pattern.
 Key Point…
Before you begin setting the pattern park position, we suggest you place the machine online (F3, F1).
With the machine online, the Design Jog feature will be readily available to assist in defining the Park location. See
Design Considerations (Placement of Objects) for details.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To configure the pattern Park position:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1 (FILE). The system will display the File menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:OPEN
 From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
The system will display the Pattern properties screen.
 Press PAGE DOWN to display the Park Screen.
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
*001:[TEXT:
F3:SAVE User Text:
002:[TEXT:
F4:SAVE-ASFixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
PATTERN:
The values in the adjacent boxes identify the axis
coordinates of the Park position.
SN
X:
Y:
PARK
[
[
DEFAULTS
]
]
]
]
]
INSTRUCT 
0.0000]in
4.0000]in
 Do one of the following:
 Press the JOG key
and use the Design Jog
feature to interactively position the marker and
identify the desired location.
F1 ACCEPT
or
 Enter the specific axis coordinate in each box.
 To SAVE the pattern park position settings, press F1 (ACCEPT).
 To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.
82350-
2-81
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.9.3 Default Text Settings
When you create a text string, the system automatically applies default settings that determine the size, shape, and
appearance of the printed text. You can change the default values for these parameters so that new text strings will
automatically use your specific settings when they are created.
 Key Point…


Changing the default text parameters does not affect existing text strings – only newly created ones.
If you’re new to the process of designing patterns and adding fields, please take a few minutes and review
Design Considerations for an overview of character size, shape, and construction.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To define default text settings:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F1 (FILE).
The system will display the File menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
F7:<PATTERN>
*001:[TEXT:
F3:SAVE User Text:
002:[TEXT:
F4:SAVE-ASFixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
 From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
The system will display the Pattern properties
screen.
PATTERN:
 Press PAGE DOWN until the Defaults Screen is
displayed.
SN
PARK
Height: [0.1250]in.
Width : [0.0830]in.
Pitch : [0.1250]in.
Spacing:[0.1875]in
The first three parameters define the physical size of
the characters. See illustration.
DEFAULTS
]
]
]
]
]
INSTRUCT 
Font : <SIMPLEX>
F1 ACCEPT
Height is the distance from the center of the mark at
the top of the character to the center of the mark at
the bottom.
Width is the distance from the center of the mark at
the left of the character to the center of the mark at
the right.
Pitch is the distance from the start of one character
to the start of the next character, including the space
between characters.
 Press TAB to select the Height parameter.
 Key Point…
You can manually enter width and pitch dimensions or have the system automatically calculate them based on the
character height.
 Do one of the following:
 Automatically Set Width & Pitch. Type the desired height dimension, then press ENTER. The system will
automatically calculate and apply the width and pitch dimensions based on the height.
or
 Manually Set Width & Pitch. Type the desired height dimension, then press TAB. The system will leave the
Width and Pitch dimensions unchanged for you to define them manually.
2-82
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Default Text Settings (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Spacing parameter.
PATTERN:
The Spacing parameter defines the vertical space
(line spacing) between the fields when printed.
SN
PARK
Height: [0.1250]in.
Width : [0.0830]in.
Pitch : [0.1250]in.
Spacing:[0.1875]in
 Enter the desired line spacing.
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT 
Font : <SIMPLEX>
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Font parameter.
PATTERN:
The Font parameter defines the character set
that will be used to print the arc text string. It
determines the shape and appearance of the
characters. Refer to Font Selection for details.
SN
PARK
Height: [0.1250]in.
Width : [0.0830]in.
Pitch : [0.1250]in.
Spacing:[0.1875]in
 Press ENTER until the desired font is displayed.
DEFAULTS
INSTRUCT 
Font : <SIMPLEX>
F1 ACCEPT
 To SAVE the default text parameter settings, press
F1 (ACCEPT).
 To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.
82350-
2-83
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.9.4 Pattern Instructions
You may add special notes or informative instructions to your patterns that will be displayed in a pop-up window
automatically whenever the pattern is opened. This feature is especially useful for displaying comments about how the
pattern is to be used, noting the type of components it is designed to mark, or communicating special setup conditions to
the operator.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To define instructions for the pattern:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1 (FILE). The system will display the File menu.
 From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
The system will display the Pattern properties screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:OPEN
F2:NEW
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:SAVE
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:SAVE-AS
003:[
]
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
]
F6:TEST
005:[
]
 Press PAGE DOWN until the Instructions Screen is
displayed.
 To add pattern instructions, type the message you
wish to display into the text box.
Note: You can force the system to display a second line
by adding \N to the instruction text.
PATTERN:
For example, if you enter the instruction text as:
Instructions: [
SN
PARK
DEFAULTS
]
This is a test! \N T esting 12345
The system will display the following instructions when
the Input command is processed:
F1 ACCEPT
This is a Test!
Testing 12345
 To remove pattern instructions, delete all characters
from the text box, including spaces and carriage returns.
Note: If any non-printable characters (e.g., line breaks
or carriage returns) remain in the text box, the
system will display a blank pop-up window when
the pattern opens.
 To SAVE the pattern instructions, press F1 (ACCEPT).
 To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.
2-84
82350-
INSTRUCT 
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.9.5 X/Y-axis Speed Parameters
The system software defines a range of acceptable speeds at which the system can mark to ensure precise character
formation. Within that range, you can adjust the speed of the marker in 10% increments. You may also adjust the marker
maximum speed. The maximum speed is the fastest rate (in steps per second) that the marker will use while executing
large moves. Large moves are those that typically require 200 or more steps.
These parameter values are saved with the pattern so that specific settings will be applied to the software whenever the
pattern is opened. Changing these pattern-specific parameters will affect only the currently opened pattern. The settings
will not affect any other pattern stored in the controller.
 Key Point…
These speed parameters may be defined for use as system defaults. Refer to Marker Properties (Chapter 3).
The pattern-specific values stored with each pattern will override the system default settings defined for the marker.
Before you begin, open the pattern you wish to edit.
To configure the pattern X/Y-axis Speed parameters:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
DESN
–Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:OPEN
 From the File menu, press F5 (PROPERTIES).
F2:NEW
*001:[TEXT:
F3:SAVE User Text:
002:[TEXT:
F4:SAVE-ASFixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F5:PROPERTIES
004:[
F6:TEST
005:[
F1 (FILE). The system will display the File menu.
The system will display the Pattern properties screen.
 Press PAGE DOWN until the X/Y Screen is displayed.
]
]
]
]
]
 Verify the cursor is on the Speed Rate parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
PATTERN : 
 Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.


X/Y
Higher rates will result in faster marking times.
Slower rates will result in slower marking times,
but will improve the quality of the printed mark.
<
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
 Press TAB to select the Max Speed Rate parameter.
The maximum speed is the fastest rate the marker
will use while executing large moves. Large moves are
those that typically require 200 or more steps. This
includes non-marking moves as when Pre-position,
Park, and Online commands are executed.
 Press ENTER to increase the max speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the max speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.
PATTERN:

X/Y
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
<
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
82350-
2-85
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
X/Y-axis Speed Parameters (continued)
 SS3700 Marker Only:
Press TAB to select the End Speed Rate parameter.
The End Speed is the braking speed the marker uses
when it is slowing down.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the end speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 12.5% to 100%.

X/Y
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
 Press ENTER to increase the end speed rate.

PATTERN: 
Increase the End speed if you notice the marker is
rounding the corners when it marks right angles.
<
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
F1 ACCEPT
Decrease the End speed if you notice the marker
overshooting the corners when it marks right angles.
 SS3700 Marker Only:
Press TAB to select the Diagonal Speed Rate parameter.
The Diagonal speed is the rate the marker moves when it
travels in both the X-axis and Y-axis at the same time.
 Press ENTER to increase the diagonal speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the diagonal speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.


Higher rates may result in faster marking times.
Slower rates will improve the quality of the printed
mark and produce more accurate diagonal lines.
 To SAVE the pattern X/Y-axis speed settings, press F1 (ACCEPT).
 To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.
2-86
82350-
PATTERN: 
X/Y
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
<
F1 ACCEPT
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.10 REMOTE PATTERN SELECTION
The Remote Pattern Selection feature allows the system to monitor up to seven dedicated input signals transmitted from a
remote, customer-supplied I/O device. These signals (SEL_6 through SEL_0) are received at the TMC470 I/O Port. The
ON/OFF combinations of the seven input signals generate binary codes ranging from 0000000 (0) through 1111111 (127).
2.10.1 Reserved Pattern Names
Each code corresponds to specific reserved pattern name. As the input signals are received, the system interprets their
codes, then loads the pattern with reserved pattern name associated with that code. All patterns to be opened via Remote
Pattern Selection must be stored in the controller and must use the specific pattern names listed below.
Note that if all seven input signals are OFF, the resulting code is 0000000. This effectively disables the Remote Pattern
Selection feature so the pattern may be loaded manually by the operator.
2.10.2 Parameter Configuration
The SEL_6 input signal may be configured either to remotely place the marker online (default setting) or to remotely select
patterns stored in the controller. Refer to Startup Properties (Chapter 3). Pattern names shaded in gray (below) may be remotely
selected only if the SEL_6 input is configured for pattern selection. If configured to place the marker online, the SEL_6 signal state
will be ignored for remote pattern selection. This will reduce the number of patterns available for remote selection from 127 to 63.
See chart below.
Reserved Pattern Names for Remote Pattern Selection
Signal State
Sel_ (n)
6543210
Reserved
Pattern
Name
Signal State
Sel_ (n)
6543210
Reserved
Pattern
Name
Signal State
Sel_ (n)
6543210
Reserved
Pattern
Name
Signal State
Sel_ (n)
6543210
Reserved
Pattern
Name
0000000
(disabled)
0I00000
PAT032
I000000
PAT064
II00000
PAT096
000000I
PAT001
0I0000I
PAT033
I00000I
PAT065
II0000I
PAT097
00000I0
PAT002
0I000I0
PAT034
I0000I0
PAT066
II000I0
PAT098
00000II
PAT003
0I000II
PAT035
I0000II
PAT067
II000II
PAT099
0000I00
PAT004
0I00I00
PAT036
I000I00
PAT068
II00I00
PAT100
0000I0I
PAT005
0I00I0I
PAT037
I000I0I
PAT069
II00I0I
PAT101
0000II0
PAT006
0I00II0
PAT038
I000II0
PAT070
II00II0
PAT102
0000III
PAT007
0I00III
PAT039
I000III
PAT071
II00III
PAT103
000I000
PAT008
0I0I000
PAT040
I00I000
PAT072
II0I000
PAT104
000I00I
PAT009
0I0I00I
PAT041
I00I00I
PAT073
II0I00I
PAT105
000I0I0
PAT010
0I0I0I0
PAT042
I00I0I0
PAT074
II0I0I0
PAT106
000I0II
PAT011
0I0I0II
PAT043
I00I0II
PAT075
II0I0II
PAT107
000II00
PAT012
0I0II00
PAT044
I00II00
PAT076
II0II00
PAT108
000II0I
PAT013
0I0II0I
PAT045
I00II0I
PAT077
II0II0I
PAT109
000III0
PAT014
0I0III0
PAT046
I00III0
PAT078
II0III0
PAT110
000IIII
PAT015
0I0IIII
PAT047
I00IIII
PAT079
II0IIII
PAT111
00I0000
PAT016
0II0000
PAT048
I0I0000
PAT080
III0000
PAT112
00I000I
PAT017
0II000I
PAT049
I0I000I
PAT081
III000I
PAT113
00I00I0
PAT018
0II00I0
PAT050
I0I00I0
PAT082
III00I0
PAT114
00I00II
PAT019
0II00II
PAT051
I0I00II
PAT083
III00II
PAT115
00I0I00
PAT020
0II0I00
PAT052
I0I0I00
PAT084
III0I00
PAT116
00I0I0I
PAT021
0II0I0I
PAT053
I0I0I0I
PAT085
III0I0I
PAT117
00I0II0
PAT022
0II0II0
PAT054
I0I0II0
PAT086
III0II0
PAT118
00I0III
PAT023
0II0III
PAT055
I0I0III
PAT087
III0III
PAT119
00II000
PAT024
0III000
PAT056
I0II000
PAT088
IIII000
PAT120
00II00I
PAT025
0III00I
PAT057
I0II00I
PAT089
IIII00I
PAT121
00II0I0
PAT026
0III0I0
PAT058
I0II0I0
PAT090
IIII0I0
PAT122
00II0II
PAT027
0III0II
PAT059
I0II0II
PAT091
IIII0II
PAT123
00III00
PAT028
0IIII00
PAT060
I0III00
PAT092
IIIII00
PAT124
00III0I
PAT029
0IIII0I
PAT061
I0III0I
PAT093
IIIII0I
PAT125
00IIII0
PAT030
0IIIII0
PAT062
I0IIII0
PAT094
IIIIII0
PAT126
00IIIII
PAT031
0IIIIII
PAT063
I0IIIII
PAT095
IIIIIII
PAT127
82350-
2-87
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
2.11 MANAGE THE CONTROLLER LIBRARY
The Manager Screen displays the library of pattern files, block files, and custom (user) files stored in the controller. From
the Manager Screen, you can check available controller memory, display the time/date stamp of each file, display the size
of each file, and delete files from the controller.
NOTICE
The system must be placed in Supervisor mode to access the Manager Screen.
2.11.1 View Library Files
 Place the system in Supervisor mode.
Refer to Access System Parameters (Chapter 3) for
details.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup menu.
 From the Setup menu, press F5 (MANAGEMENT).
The system will display the Manager Screen.
 Press F7 to select the type of file you wish to view:
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
<PATTERNS>, <PARAMS> (parameters),
<USER FONTS>, or <BLOCKS>.
The top line shows the total number of files (of the
selected type) stored in the controller, the current
page number, and the total number of pages for
that type of file.
Adjacent to each file name, the system displays a
date and time stamp showing when each file was last
saved.
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
 If more one page exists, press PAGE DOWN and
PAGE UP to scroll through the list of files.
 To view the file sizes, press F8 (SIZE).
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
This screen displays the actual size of the each
stored file (e.g., 248 bytes).
Depending on the allocated file size, the system can
store up to 200 patterns files (at 8Kb each) and 12
block files (at 64Kb each). Refer to Startup Options:
Allocating File Size (Chapter 3) for details.
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
 To re-display the date and time stamps, press F8
(DATE).
 Press ESC to return to the Supervisor Main Screen.
2-88
82350-
248
256
312
282
324
F8 DATE
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
NOTICE
The system must be placed in Supervisor mode to access the Manager Screen.
2.11.2 Delete Library Files
 Place the system in Supervisor mode.
Refer to Access System Parameters (Chapter 3) for details.
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 From the Setup menu, press F5 (MANAGEMENT).
The system will display the Manager Screen.
 To delete a single file:
 Press F7 to select the type of file you wish to delete:
<PATTERNS>, <USER FONTS>, or <BLOCKS>.
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
Note: If you wish to delete <PARAMS> parameter
files, please refer to Reset System
Parameters (Chapter 3) for important
details.
 Press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the file
name.
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
 When the file is displayed, note the key (F1 through
F5) listed beside the file name.
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
 Press the appropriate key to delete the file.
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
(For example, press F1 to delete the file
SAMPLE_01.)
The system will prompt you to confirm your
command.
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
 Press F1 to delete the selected file (press F2 to
cancel).
 Press ESC to return to the Supervisor Main Screen.
82350-
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
Delete selected
Pattern?
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F1-Yes
F2-No
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
2-89
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Delete Library Files (continued)
 To delete ALL files of a selected file type:
 Press F7 to select the type of files you wish to
delete:
<PATTERNS>, <USER FONTS>, or <BLOCKS>.
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
Note: If you wish to delete <PARAMS> parameter
files, please refer to Reset System
Parameters (Chapter 3) for important
details.
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
 Press F6 (CLEAN).
MANAGER(1581056) Total:007 Page:01 of 02
The system will prompt you to confirm your
command.
F1-[SAMPLE_01
]:02/24/08;03:41:54
Delete all patterns
from memory?
F2-[SAMPLE_02
]:02/24/08;05:07:58
F3-[SAMPLE_03
]:02/24/08;03:45:14
F1-Yes
F2-No
F4-[SAMPLE_04
]:02/24/08;03:46:00
F5-[SAMPLE_05
]:02/24/08;03:46:24
F6 CLEAN F7 <PATTERNS>
F8 SIZE
 Press F1 to delete ALL selected files
(press F2 to cancel).
 Press ESC to return to the Supervisor Main Screen.
2-90
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Chapter 3
System Configuration & Management
Parameters and options that control the system configuration are universally applied during system operation. Unlike some
parameters that are stored with the pattern definition and apply only to a particular pattern, the system parameters apply
to all patterns and to all marker operations. This section provides instructions for configuring the following system-level
parameters and options.









Accessing system parameters
Defining system passwords
Setting marker parameters
Defining query text
Defining date codes
Defining shift codes
Defining Omni serial numbers
Setting startup parameters
Setting host communications









Configuring remote pattern selection
Setting serial communications
Setting Ethernet communications
Setting the clock and calendar
Setting units of measure
Enabling the marking pin
Backing up/Restoring patterns, fonts, & parameters
Resetting system parameters
Performing system tests
82350-
3-1
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.1 ACCESS SYSTEM PARAMETERS
Most system parameters require Supervisor-mode access, although some can be configured from Designer-mode. Where
Designer-mode access is sufficient, it will be clearly marked in the following procedures.
To place the system in Supervisor mode:
 From the Operator (or Designer) Main Screen, press
F5 (SETUP) then press F1 LEVEL
The system will display the Setup menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline–Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
F1:LEVEL
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F2:QUERY TEXT
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SETUP-LEVEL
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 F1:OPERSTOR
F2:DESIGNER
001:[
]
F3:SUPERVISOR
002:[
]
003:[
]
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F3 SUPERVISOR .
The system will display the Password prompt.
Access System Parameters (continued)
 Type the password into the Enter Password box. If a
password has not been defined, leave the box empty
(blank).
Note: A password may be defined to restrict access
to Supervisor-level features. See System
Passwords for details.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
OPER –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
]
The system will return to the Main Screen.
The system displays SUPV to indicate it is in
Supervisor mode. Although the Main Screen looks
the same as Operator or Designer Mode, the dropdown menus now provide many more options and
privileges.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:UNTITLED
:000
 Press F1 (ACCEPT).
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
3-2
Enter Password [
001:[
002:[
003:[
004:[
005:[
82350-
F1 ACCEPT
F2 CANCEL
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.2 SYSTEM PASSWORDS
The Password feature allows you to define (or change) the access password for the Designer and Supervisor modes. This
feature provides a measure of security for commands and options that should not be accessed by Operator-level personnel.
Without the proper password, access to the Designer Main Screen and/or the Supervisor Main Screen and their subsequent
features will be denied.
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F4 (PROPERTIES) to access the PROPERTIES
menu.
 Press F7 PASSWORD to access the PASSWORD
screen.
 Define the Supervisor-Level Password:
 Verify the cursor is in the Supervisor-Level text
box. If not, press TAB to select it.
 Type the Supervisor password in the text box.
Note: The password is not case-sensitive.
F1:FILE FSETUP:
2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
Properties
AUX
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 Set the Designer-Level password (below)
F1:MARKER
F5:ETHERNET
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F2:STARTUP
F6:CLOCK
002:[TEXT:
Fixed Text: ABCDE
F3:HOST
F7:PASSWORD
003:[ F SERIAL2
4:
004:[
005:[
or
 Press F1 (SAVE) to store the Supervisor password
and exit the Editor Screen.
 Define the Designer-Level Password:
]
]
]
]
]
 Press TAB to move the cursor to the DesignerLevel text box.
 Type the Designer password in the text box.
Note: The password is not case-sensitive.
------------ PASSWORD EDITOR ------------
 Press F1 (SAVE) to store the Designer password
and exit the Editor Screen.
 Reset Password Defaults:
 If you wish to remove both passwords, press F2
(DEFAULTS).
The system set both passwords to a null string
(no password).
Supervisor-Level:
[
]
Designer-Level:
[
]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press F1 (SAVE) to store the default settings and
exit the Editor Screen.
82350-
3-3
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.3 MARKER PROPERTIES
The marker parameters allow you to set the software to match the physical configuration of the marking head. Additionally,
the marker parameters provide some control options for printing and marker movement. These parameters settings will be
used as the system defaults whenever a new pattern is created. When these Parameters are changed, they will need to be
saved as a default and in the working pattern open at the time of the change to be permanent
 Key Point…



Many of these parameters may be re-defined by the Designer and saved with the pattern. Refer to Default Pin
Parameters (Chapter 2). Any pattern-specific values stored with a pattern will override the system default settings
defined for the marker.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
The system will display the Setup Menu.
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
Press F4 to select PROPERTIES .
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
Press F1 MARKER to access the Marker Screen.
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
The Marker parameters are displayed on two separate
005:[
]
pages (General and Pin).
 Verify the cursor is on the Homing Option parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it..
The Homing Option parameter defines when, during the
print cycle, the marker will move to the Home position.
If there is a chance the pin cartridge can be jarred, the
Home Print feature allows you to reset the marker as
part of the print cycle so it may re-establish its correct
position.
Before moves the marker from the Park position to the
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SETUP:
Properties
AUX
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:MARKER
F5:ETHERNET
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F2:STARTUP
F6:CLOCK
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
F3:HOST
F7:PASSWORD
003:[
F4:SERIAL2
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
Home position, then prints.
After moves the marker to Home after printing and
before returning to the Park position.
MARKER:
None prevents the marker from seeking Home as part
of the print cycle.
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired homing option, then press ENTER.
 Press TAB to select the Speed Rate parameter.
The system provides a range of acceptable speeds at
which the system can mark to ensure precise character
formation. Within that range, you can adjust the speed
of the marker in 10% increments
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.
Higher rates will result in faster marking times.
Homing Option: <None >
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
<
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
MARKER:
GENERAL
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
PIN
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
Slower rates will result in slower marking times,
but will improve the quality of the printed mark.
 Press TAB to select the Max Speed Rate parameter.
The maximum speed is the fastest rate the marker will
use while executing large moves (e.g., those that
require 200 or more steps). This includes non-marking
moves as when Pre-position, Park, and Online
commands are executed.

Press ENTER to increase the max speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the max speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.
3-4
PIN
Homing Option: <None >
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
<
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press ENTER to increase the speed rate.


GENERAL
82350-
MARKER:
GENERAL
PIN
Homing Option: <None >
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
<
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Marker Properties (continued)
 SS3700 Marker Only:
Press TAB to select the End Speed Rate parameter.
The End Speed is the braking speed the marker uses
when it is slowing down.
 Press ENTER to increase the end speed rate.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the end speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 12.5% to 100%.


Increase the End speed if you notice the marker is
rounding the corners when it marks right angles.
MARKER:
GENERAL
PIN
Homing Option: <None >
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
<
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Decrease the End speed if you notice the marker
overshooting the corners when it marks right angles.
 SS3700 Marker Only:
MARKER:
 Press ENTER to increase the diagonal speed rate.
Homing Option: <None >
Speed Rate:
<
Max Speed Rate:
<
End Speed Rate:
<
Diagonal Speed Rate:
<
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Press TAB to select the Diagonal Speed Rate parameter.
The Diagonal speed is the rate the marker moves when it
travels in both the X-axis and Y-axis at the same time.
Press CTRL + ENTER to decrease the diagonal speed rate.
The pointer indicates the speed from 10% to 100%.


>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
GENERAL
PIN
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
>:100%
Higher rates may result in faster marking times.
Slower rates will improve the quality of the printed
mark and produce more accurate diagonal lines.
MARKER:
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Impact Delay parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Impact Delay parameter defines the delay between
the time the pin extends (impacts) and the time the
marker begins moving (marking). The default value is
2 ms (minimum delay). You may increase the delay in
increments of 50 ms.
 Press TAB to select the Retract Delay parameter.
The Retract Delay parameter defines the delay between
the time the marker finishes marking and the time
when the pin retracts. The default value is 20 ms.
GENERAL
PIN
Impact Delay:<
Retract Delay: [20
Pulse Delay:
[50
]ms
]ms
>
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
MARKER:
GENERAL
PIN
Impact Delay:<
Retract Delay: [20
Pulse Delay:
[50
]ms
]ms
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
MARKER:
GENERAL
PIN
Impact Delay : <
Retract Delay: [20
Pulse Delay:
[50
]ms
]ms
Stroke:[0.200]
Pressure: < 80>
Return: < 20>
> Stroke:[0.200]
Pressure: < 80>
Return: < 20>
 Type the retract delay into the text box.
 Press TAB to select the Pulse Delay parameter.
This parameters defines the delay (in milliseconds)
between pin firings when you pulse the marking pin
during maintenance tests. Normally, the pulse delay is
set at 50 ms. However, it may be set from 1 ms to
2000 ms (2 seconds).
F1 SAVE
82350-
> Stroke:[0.200]
Pressure: < 80>
Return: < 20>
F2 DEFAULTS
3-5
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
 Type the pulse delay into the text box.
Marker Properties (continued)
MARKER:
 SS3700 Marker Only:
Press TAB to select the Stroke parameter.
The Stroke parameter defines the distance between the
tip of the retracted pin and the material being marked.
GENERAL
PIN
Impact Delay: <
Retract Delay: [20
Pulse Delay:
[50
]ms
]ms
> Stroke:[0.200]
Pressure: < 80>
Return: < 20>
 Measure the actual stroke distance you have set up for
your marker, then type that value into the text box.
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
MARKER:
GENERAL
PIN
Impact Delay: <
Retract Delay: [20
Pulse Delay:
[50
]ms
]ms
 SS3700 Marker Only:
Press TAB to select the Pressure parameter.
The Pressure parameter defines the drive air pressure
for your marking system.
Press ENTER to toggle through the available settings.
 Key Point…
Set the drive air pressure on the filter/regulator unit
to match the parameter value you set for the
Pressure parameter. If the actual pressure cannot be
set to the chosen parameter value, set the parameter
value to the next lower selection and print a sample.
Then, change the parameter to the next higher
selection and print another sample. Examine both
samples and use the parameter settings that produce
the most satisfactory result.
 SS3700 Marker Only:
Press TAB to select the Return parameter.
The Return parameter defines the return air pressure
for your marking system.
Press ENTER to toggle through the available settings.
 Key Point…
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
MARKER:
GENERAL
PIN
Impact Delay:<
Retract Delay: [20
Pulse Delay:
[50
]ms
]ms
> Stroke:[0.200]
Pressure: < 80>
Return:
< 20>
> Stroke:[0.200]
Pressure: < 80>
Return:
< 20>
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Set the return air pressure on the filter/regulator unit
to match the parameter value you set for the
Pressure parameter. If the actual pressure cannot
be set to the chosen parameter value, set the
parameter value to the next lower selection and print
a sample. Then, change the parameter to the next higher selection and print another sample. Examine both
samples and use the parameter settings that produce the most satisfactory result.
 Press F1 (SAVE) to store the marker parameter settings.
 To reset all marker parameters to their default settings:
 Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
 Press F1 (SAVE)
3-6
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.4 QUERY TEXT PROPERTIES
 Key Point…
The buffer text and the buffer titles may be edited by Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel.
Operator-level personnel are permitted to edit only the buffer text.
The Query Text feature provides a way for operators to edit several text strings in a pattern at the same time. This feature
requires the %#Q message flag or %#q message flag to be included in one or more of your text strings.
The flags represent the text and titles of individual buffers you define in the Query Text lookup table. The system will use
the lookup table to insert the appropriate buffer title and buffer text into your pattern wherever the flags are used.
Up to twenty (20) buffers may be defined.


Lowercase flags %1q, %2q,… %20q will be replaced with the titles of buffers 1, 2,… 20 respectively.
Uppercase flags %1Q, %2Q,… %20Q will be replaced with the text of buffers 1, 2,… 20 respectively.
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 From the Setup Menu, press F2 (QUERY TEXT).
The system will display the Query Text lookup table.
The Query Text lookup table has 20 buffers with
five buffers listed on each page.
Buffer titles (e.g., 1,2,3,4,5 on the left side) can
be edited only by Designer- or Supervisor-level
users. Titles help identify what type of data the
operator is to enter into each buffer.
QUERY TEXT:
1
2
3
4
5
F1 SAVE
Buffer text (on the right side) is where Operatorlevel users may enter data into the text buffers.
Designer- and Supervisor-level users may also
enter data into the buffers for use as initial values.
 Verify the cursor is in the first buffer Title box
1-5
6-10
11-15
16-20
:[
:[
:[
:[
:[
F2 DEFAULTS
]
]
]
]
]
(e.g., 1). If not, press TAB to select it.
 Type the title of the first buffer into the Title box
(e.g., “Your Title”).
Note: Pressing ESC while editing the Query Text lookup table will abandon any changes you’ve made and return to
the Main Screen.
 Press TAB to move to the first buffer Text box.
 Type data into the buffer Text box
(e.g., “Your first buffer data”).
QUERY TEXT:
 Press TAB to move to the next buffer and edit the
Title and Text boxes as applicable.
1-5
6-10
11-15
Your Title:[Your first buffer data
2
:[
3
:[
4
:[
5
:[
F1 SAVE F2 DEFAULTS
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional buffers.
 Press F1 (SAVE) to store the Query Text buffer
16-20
]
]
]
]
]
settings.
 To reset the Query Text buffer settings to their default settings:
 Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
 Press F1 (SAVE)
82350-
3-7
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.5 DATE CODE PROPERTIES
 Key Point…
The Date Code properties used by the system may be edited by Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel.
The Date Code features allow you to encode the current time/date information within the printed text.
This feature requires these special message flags to be included in one or more of the pattern text strings:




Encoded Hour Flag: %h
(lowercase)
Encoded Day Flag: %d
(lowercase)
Encoded Month Flag:
%U
Encoded Year Flag: %E
(uppercase)
(uppercase)
When the system encounters one of these flags, it uses the controller clock/calendar and the Date Code lookup tables to
extract the appropriate code character for each flag. It then inserts the character(s) into the pattern for printing.
The Date Code feature provides four lookup tables – one each for encoding the hour, day, month and year.




The Hour of Day Table contains 24 entries, one for each hour of the day.
The Month Day Table contains 31 entries, one for each possible day of the month.
The Month Table contains 12 entries, one for each month of the year.
The Year Table contains 10 entries, one for each year of the decade.
For example:
Suppose the Year Table is defined as follows:
A B C D E F G H I J
The system uses the lookup table to substitute the year code for the current year as follows:
Table Position
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
6th
7th
8th
9th
10th
Year Code
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
Current Year
2000
2001
2002
2003
2004
2005
2006
2007
2008
2009
When an Encoded Year Flag (%E) is encountered in a pattern, the system insert “I” for the year 2008.
 Key Point…
The first position in the Year Table corresponds to the first year of the decade (e.g., 2000).
The last position in the Year Table corresponds to the last year of the decade (e.g., 2009).
The same table-position/date-unit relationship applies to the hour, day, and month tables.
To configure the Date Code lookup tables:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen,
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
 Press F3 to select the DESIGN menu.
 Press F2 USER to access the User Screen.
The User Screen provides parameters on three
separate pages (General, Shifts, and Omni SN).
The Date Code lookup tables are on the first page.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SETUP: Design
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:UNITS
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F2:USER
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
3-8
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Date Code Properties (continued)
 Verify the cursor is on the Month lookup table.
USER:
If not, press TAB to select it.
This table allows you to assign a separate, single
character to represent each month of the year.
Note: The first entry represents January;
the last entry represents December.
GENERAL
Month:
Year:
Month Day:
Hour of Day:
 Type the 12 code characters into the table.
SHIFTS
OMNI SN
[123456789OND]
[0123456789]
[123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO]
[0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMN]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press TAB to select the Year lookup table.
This table allows you to assign a separate, single
character to represent each year of the decade.
Note: The first entry represents the first year of
the decade (e.g., 2000);
the last entry represents the last year of
the decade (e.g., 2009).
USER:
GENERAL
Month:
Year:
Month Day:
Hour of Day:
SHIFTS
[123456789OND]
[0123456789]
[123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO]
[0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMN]
F1 SAVE
 Type the 10 code characters into the table.
OMNI SN
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press TAB to select the Month Day lookup table.
This table allows you to assign a separate, single
character to represent each day of the month.
Note: The first entry represents day 1;
the last entry represents day 31.
USER:
GENERAL
Month:
Year:
Month Day:
Hour of Day:
 Type the 31 code characters into the table.
SHIFTS
OMNI SN
[123456789OND]
[0123456789]
[123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO]
[0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMN]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press TAB to select the Hour of Day lookup table.
This table allows you to assign a separate, single
character to represent each hour of the day.
Note: The first entry represents midnight;
the last entry represents 11:00 p.m.
USER:
GENERAL
Month:
Year:
Month Day:
Hour of Day:
 Type the 24 code characters into the table.
SHIFTS
OMNI SN
[123456789OND]
[0123456789]
[123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNO]
[0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMN]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press F1 (SAVE) to store the Date Code lookup table
settings.
CAUTION
Resetting the Date Code lookup table settings will also reset the Shift Code
lookup table and the Omni SN parameters to their factory default settings. All
parameters that have been specifically configured for your system will be
overwritten with the default values.
 To reset all User Properties settings (Date Codes, Shift Codes, Omni SN) to their default settings:
 Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
 Press F1 (SAVE)
82350-
3-9
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.6 SHIFT CODE PROPERTIES
 Key Point…
The Shift Code lookup table used by the system may be edited by Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel.
The Shift Code features allow you to encode the current work shift within the printed text. This feature requires the
Encoded Shift Flag (%Z) to be included in one or more of the pattern text strings.
When the system encounters this flag, it uses the controller clock/calendar and the Shift Code lookup tables to extract the
appropriate code character for the current shift. It then inserts the character into the pattern for printing.
For example:
Suppose the Shift Table is defined as follows:
Table Position
1st
2nd
3rd
Shift Code
F
S
T
08:00
16:00
00:00
Shift (Start) Time
When an Encoded Shift flag (%Z) is encountered in a pattern, the system will insert the appropriate shift code based
on the time of day the pattern is printed.



The first code character (F) will be inserted when the pattern prints between 8:00 a.m. and 3:59:59 p.m.
The second code character (S) will be inserted when the pattern prints between 4:00 p.m. and 11:59:59 p.m.
The third code character (T) will be inserted when the pattern prints between midnight and 7:59:59 a.m.
 Key Point…
The first position in the Shift Table corresponds to the first shift (Shift 1) start time (e.g., 08:00).
The second position in the Shift Table corresponds to the second shift (Shift 2) start time (e.g., 16:00).
The third position in the Shift Table corresponds to the third shift (Shift 3) start time (e.g., 00:00).
Special Consideration: If your facility runs less than three shifts each day, you should set the Shift Table to “ignore”
those shifts that don’t exist. For example, if you only run two shifts, define the Shift Table in the example above as “F
S S” (representing First, Second, Second). This way, the system inserts an “F” into the pattern during the 1st shift
only. It will insert an “S” into the pattern at all other times.
To configure the Shift Code lookup table:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press F5
(SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
 Press F3 DESIGN selection to USER.
 Press F2 user to access the User Screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
The User Screen provides parameters on three separate
pages (General, Shifts, and Omni SN).
The Shift Code lookup table is on the second page.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SETUP: Design
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:UNITS
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F2:USER
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press PAGE DOWN until the User Shifts Screen is
displayed.
3-10
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Shift Code Properties (continued)
 Verify the cursor is on the Shift lookup table.
If not, press TAB to select it.
This table allows you to assign a separate, single
character to represent each shift of the work day.
Note: The first entry represents Shift 1.
The second entry represents Shift 2.
The third entry represents Shift 3.
USER:
GENERAL
SHIFTS
OMNI SN
Shift Table: [123]
Shift 1
Times: [08:00]
Shift 2
[16:00]
Shift 3
[00:00]
 Type the 3 code characters into the table.
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press TAB to select Shift 1 (or Shift 2 or Shift 3) .
The Shift Times consist of three text boxes.
Each box defines the time of day the shift begins.
USER:
GENERAL
SHIFTS
OMNI SN
Shift Table: [123]
 Type the start time for each shift in the appropriate
text box.
Shift 1
Times: [08:00]
Shift 2
[16:00]
F1 SAVE
Shift 3
[00:00]
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press F1 (SAVE) to store the Shift Code lookup table
settings.
CAUTION
Resetting the Shift Code lookup table settings will also reset the Date Code
lookup table and the Omni serial number parameters to their factory default
settings. All parameters that have been specifically configured for your system
will be overwritten with the default values.
 To reset all User Properties settings (Date Codes, Shift Codes, Omni SN) to their default settings:
 Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
 Press F1 (SAVE)
82350-
3-11
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.7 OMNI SERIAL NUMBER PROPERTIES
 Key Point…
The Omni serial number parameters may be configured by Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel.
The Omni serial number allows you to continue a serial number sequence throughout the marking of several patterns.
Unlike pattern serial numbers which are stored with the individual patterns, the Omni serial number is stored in permanent
memory. It applies to all patterns that contain an Omni serial number flag (%O or %o).
The Omni serial number value is updated each time a pattern containing an Omni serial number flag is printed. The Omni
serial number automatically wraps (resets) when its limit is reached. Optionally, you can program the Omni serial number
to reset at a specific time or you can manually change it whenever you wish.
To configure the Omni serial number properties:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
F5 (SETUP). The system will display the Setup Menu.
 Press F3 to open the DESIGN Menu.
 Press F2 USER to access the User Screen.
The User Screen provides parameters on three
separate pages (General, Shifts, and Omni SN).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SETUP: Design
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:UNITS
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F2:USER
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press PAGE DOWN until the Omni SN Screen is
displayed.
USER:
 Verify the cursor is on the Lower parameter.
GENERAL
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Lower parameter defines the minimum value of
the Omni serial number.
 Type the lower serial number limit in the text box.
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F1 SAVE
 Press TAB to select the Upper parameter.
OMNI SN
F2 DEFAULTS
The Upper parameter defines the maximum value of
the Omni serial number.
 Type the upper serial number limit in the text box.
USER:
 Press TAB to select the SN parameter.
The SN parameter shows the current serial number
value. This is the next number to be marked in fields
that contain an Omni serial number flag.
Note: You can manually change the Omni serial
number at any time by editing this parameter.
 To change the current Omni serial number, type the
desired value in the text box.
3-12
82350-
GENERAL
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
F1 SAVE
OMNI SN
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F2 DEFAULTS
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Omni Serial Number Properties (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Alpha parameter.
The Alpha parameter defines the single, uppercase,
alphabetic character that will be inserted into the
pattern wherever the Omni Alpha flag (%a) is located.
The lower alpha limit is A; the upper limit is Z.
The alpha character automatically bumps when the
numeric portion of the Omni serial number wraps.
Note: If the Delta parameter value (see below) is
positive, the alpha character will bump up.
If the Delta value is negative, it will bump down.
USER:
GENERAL
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
OMNI SN
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Type the alpha character in the text box. You may use
any uppercase character (A, B, C… Z).
 Press TAB to select the Delta parameter.
The Delta parameter defines the amount the
system will increase (or decrease) the Omni serial
number when it automatically updates the number.
The Delta parameter value may be positive or
negative to increase or decrease the Omni serial
number. When the limit is reached, the system will
automatically wrap (reset) the number.


USER:
GENERAL
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F1 SAVE
If the Delta parameter is positive, the system
will reset the serial number to the lower limit.
OMNI SN
F2 DEFAULTS
If the Delta parameter is negative, the system
will reset the serial number to the upper limit.
 Type the delta value in the text box.


Enter a positive value for the system to automatically increase the serial number.
Enter a negative value for the system to automatically decrease the serial number.
82350-
3-13
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Omni Serial Number Properties (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Reset parameter.
The Reset parameter defines when the Omni serial
number will automatically reset to its lower limit.
USER:
None – only when it reaches its upper limit.
GENERAL
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
Daily – each day at a specific time as defined by
the Time parameter (below).
Shift – at the start of each work shift as defined in
the User Shifts lookup table. See Shift Code
Properties to define work shift start times.
OMNI SN
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Hourly – at the start of each hour based on the
TMC470 internal clock.
Monthly – at the start of each month based on the
TMC470 internal calendar.
 If you set the Reset parameter to Daily,
press TAB to select the Time parameter.
The Time parameter defines the time of day the
reset will occur if a Daily reset is scheduled.
USER:
GENERAL
SHIFTS
Lower:[000000001]
Upper:[000999999]
SN
:[000000001]
Alpha:[A]
 Type the reset time of day in the text box.
Note: Specify times using the 24-hour clock
format where midnight = 00:00, 1
a.m. = 01:00, noon = 12:00, and
1 p.m. = 13:00.
F1 SAVE
OMNI SN
Delta: [
1]
Reset: <None
>
Time : [00:00]
F2 DEFAULTS
NOTICE
Ensure the SN parameter value is valid (between the Lower and Upper limit
settings) before you exit this page. Otherwise, the system will issue an error
message if you attempt to save the settings or display a different page with an
invalid serial number value.
 To SAVE the Omni serial number settings, press F1 (SAVE).
 To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.
CAUTION
Resetting the Omni serial number parameters will also reset the Date Code
lookup table and the Shift Code lookup table to their factory default settings.
All parameters that have been specifically configured for your system will be
overwritten with the default values.
 To RESET ALL User Properties settings (Date Codes, Shift Codes, Omni SN) to their default settings:
 Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
 Press F1 (SAVE)
3-14
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.8 STARTUP PROPERTIES
The Startup parameters control tasks that the system will automatically perform when the controller is turned on.
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
The system will display the Setup Menu.
 Press F4 PROPERTIES to view the properties menu.
 Press F2 STARTUP to access the Startup Screen.
The Startup parameters are displayed on three
separate pages (On Startup, IO, and Disk).
 Verify the cursor is on the Pattern parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
This parameter allows you to specify the name of
the pattern the system will automatically load
during startup.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE
F4:MARKER AUX
F5:SETUP
SETUP:
Properties
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:MARKER
F5:ETHERNET
*001:[TEXT:F2User
Text:
]
:STARTUP
F6:CLOCK
002:[TEXT:F3:Fixed
HOST Text: ABCDE
F7:PASSWORD ]
003:[
]
F4:SERIAL 2
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Type the exact name of the pattern in the text box.
Note: If you wish to disable automatic pattern
loading, leave the text box blank (empty).
 Press TAB to select the Online parameter.
STARTUP:
This parameter determines whether the system will
automatically be placed online or offline when the
controller is turned on.
ON STARTUP
Pattern: [
Online:
Park on Load:
Keyboard/Display:
 Press ENTER to toggle the selection on or off.
 indicates the system will be placed offline.
STARTUP:
 Press TAB to select the Abort Select parameter.
ON STARTUP
Pattern: [
Online:
Park on Load:
Keyboard/Display:
For markers that use a remote start print switch
(e.g., push button, foot switch, discrete input, or
TTL input), this parameter controls the action of the
remote switch.
DISK
]

Abort Select: 

Legacy Menu: 
< Normal > Beep: 
F1 SAVE
 indicates the system will be placed online.
IO
F2 DEFAULTS
IO
DISK
]

Abort Select: 

Legacy Menu: 
< Normal > Beep: 
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press ENTER to toggle the selection on or off.
 indicates the feature is disabled.
The operator may simply press and release the switch
to print the pattern. Once activated, the switch has
no further affect on the print cycle.
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
Online:
Park on Load:
Keyboard/Display:
 indicates the feature is enabled.
The operator will be required to press and hold the
switch to print the pattern. If the switch is released
during the print cycle, the system will stop printing
and reset the marker to the pattern park position.
The marker will remain online after this type of
abort.
DISK

Abort Select: 

Legacy Menu: 
< Normal > Beep: 
F1 SAVE
82350-
IO
F2 DEFAULTS
3-15
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Startup Properties (continued)
 Press TAB to select the Park on Load parameter.
This parameter determines whether the marker will
automatically move to the pattern park position when a
pattern is loaded (opened).
 Press ENTER to toggle the selection on or off.
 indicates the system will not automatically park.
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
Pattern: [
Online:
Park on Load:
Keyboard/Display:
 indicates the marker will automatically park.
IO
DISK
]

Abort Select: 

Legacy Menu: 
< Normal > Beep: 
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press TAB to select the Legacy Menu parameter.
This parameter changes the Menu visual display to Legacy
mode.To use this Mode see 470 Controller Legacy
Operation Manual .
Note: After saving you must restart the controller by
turning off; then back on to reset the system.
indicates the system will remain in normal mode

indicates the system will change to Legacy Mode.
ON STARTUP
Pattern: [
Online:
Park on Load:
Keyboard/Display:
 Press ENTER to toggle the selection on or off.

STARTUP:
IO
DISK
]

Abort Select: 

Legacy Menu: 
< Normal > Beep: 
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
NOTE :To return to Normal mode, follow these steps



Ensure the system is in Supervisor mode.



Press TAB to select the Legacy Menu parameter.

Press F5 (SETUP).
Press F8 until "STARTUP" is displayed, then press
F4 (PROPERTIES).
Press ENTER to toggle the selection OFF.
Press F1 (SAVE).After the system displays the Main
Screen, turn the controller OFF.
Restart the controller.
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
IO
DISK
Pattern: [
]
Online:

Abort Select: 
Park on Load:

Legacy Menu: 
Keyboard/Display: < Normal > Beep: 
Mode: < OPERATOR >
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press TAB to select the Keyboard/Display parameter.
This parameter determines the operation state the
controller keyboard and display.
STARTUP:
 Press ENTER until the desired mode is displayed.
NORMAL fully enables the keyboard and display.
DISABLED disables the keyboard once you enter
Operator mode or restart the controller. The only key
that remains enabled is F5 (SETUP) from the Main
Screen.
ON STARTUP
Pattern: [
Online:
Park on Load:
Keyboard/Display:
IO
DISK
]

Abort Select: 

< Normal > Beep: 
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Key Point…
To restore keyboard usage, press F5 (from the Main Screen), enter the Supervisor-level password, then re-configure the
Startup Properties for normal keyboard/display operation.
NO ERRORS suppresses error messages from being displayed to the operator.
 Press TAB to select the Beep parameter.
By default, the keyboard is configured to beep whenever a key is pressed on the keyboard.
 Press ENTER to toggle the beep feature on or off.
 indicates the keyboard beep is enabled.
 indicates the keyboard beep is disabled.
3-16
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
 Press TAB to select the Mode parameter.
The Mode parameter allows you to choose the mode the
software will startup in.
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
IO
DISK
Pattern: [
]
Online:

Abort Select: 
Park on Load:

Legacy Menu: 
Keyboard/Display: < Normal > Beep: 
Mode: < OPERATOR >
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press the left and right arrows or ENTER to toggle
Operator, Designer or Supervisor mode.
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Input Function parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
This parameter defines how the marking system will
interpret the input signal received on pin 8 of the I/O
Port connector.
ONLINE – when an input signal is received, the
system will place the machine online.
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
IO
DISK
Online 
Input Function(8):
Sel 6 
Debounce: [ 100] ms
SEL 6 – when an input signal is received, the system
uses this input (and other SEL inputs) to remotely
select and load patterns. Refer to Remote Pattern
Selection (Chapter 2) for details.
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired input function, then press ENTER.
STARTUP:
 Press TAB to select the Debounce parameter.
This parameter is used when patterns are remotely
selected using an I/O device. When activity is sensed
on any of the dedicated input signals, the system will
wait the length of time specified by the Debounce
parameter before reading the inputs.
ON STARTUP
IO
DISK
Online 
Input Function(8):
Sel 6 
Debounce: [ 100] ms
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Type the desired time interval (in milliseconds) into the
text box. You may set the Debounce time from 10 ms
to 2000 ms (2 seconds).
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
CAUTION
If you change (and save) the maximum pattern size parameter, the system will
delete ALL patterns stored in the controller.
If you change (and save) the maximum block size parameter, the system will
delete ALL block files stored in the controller.
 Verify the cursor is on the Max Pattern Size parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
This parameter defines how much space the system
will allocate in memory for each pattern file. The
smaller the allocation, the more patterns you can
store. Conversely, the larger the allocation, the fewer
patterns you can store.
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
Max Pattern Size:
Max Block Size:
82350-
DISK
< 8K>
<64K>
F1 SAVE
maximum file size the controller will allocate per
pattern.
Based on the allocated size, the controller will store
approximately the following number of pattern files:
IO
F2 DEFAULTS
3-17
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
4K
8K
16K
32K
64K
400 patterns
200 patterns (default)
100 patterns
50 patterns
25 patterns
 Press TAB to select the Max Block Size parameter.
This parameter defines how much space the system
will allocate in memory for each block file. The
smaller the allocation, the more blocks you can
store. Conversely, the larger the allocation, the
fewer blocks you can store.
STARTUP:
ON STARTUP
Max Pattern Size:
Max Block Size:
IO
DISK
< 8K>
<64K>
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
maximum file size the controller will allocate per block.
Based on the allocated size, the controller will store
approximately the following number of block files:
4K
192 blocks
8K
96 blocks
16K 48 blocks
32K 24 blocks
64K 12 blocks (default)
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 To SAVE the Startup Properties settings, press F1 (SAVE).
If you changed the Max Pattern Size parameter
value, the system will prompt you to confirm your
changes.
!
!
STARTUP:
If you change (and save) the maximum pattern
size parameter, the system will delete ALL
patterns stored in the controller.
If you changed (and save) the maximum block
size parameter, the system will delete ALL
block files stored in the controller.
ON STARTUP
IO
DISK
Max Pattern Size: < 8K>
Patterns/Blocks – Erased! Continue?
Max Block Size:
<64K>
F1-Yes
F1 SAVE
F2-No
F2 DEFAULTS
 Press F1 to a continue.
All patterns and/or all blocks will be deleted from
the controller, as applicable.
or
 Press F2 to cancel and remain on the Startup
Screen.
 To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.
 To RESET the Startup Properties settings to their default settings:
 Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
Note: This will not affect the Max Pattern Size and Max Block Size parameter settings.
The Max Size parameters must be manually reset to their default values.
 Press F1 (SAVE)
3-18
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.9 HOST COMMUNICATION PROPERTIES
The Host communication parameters allow you to configure the TMC470 Comm 1 port. The Comm 1 port is a serial
interface. It may be used to transmit data, select patterns for printing, and control marker operation via remote devices
such as host computers, terminals, or bar code scanners.
The Comm 1 interface can be configured to connect with either RS232 or RS485 devices. Additionally, it may be configured
to use either Programmable Protocol or Extended Protocol. The protocol selection determines how your system passes
information to and from remote serial device.


Programmable Protocol provides "receive only" communication without error checking.
Extended Protocol provides two-way communication with error checking. Optionally, when using RS485
communications, you can connect multiple, networked TMC470 controllers to a single host device.
3.9.1 Primary Communication Parameters
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F4 PROPERTIES T to select Properties menu.
 Press F4 HOST to access the Host Screen.
The Host parameters are displayed on four pages
(Comm, Protocol, Programmable, and Echo).
The first page (COMM) provides the primary
communication parameters required for all Host
interfaces.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SETUP:Pattern:SAMPLE_02
Properties
AUX :002
SUPV –Offline–
BAUD defines the number of data bits transferred
per second. The Baud parameter must be set to
match the baud rate of the connected device.
F5:ETHERNET
*001:[TEXT:F1:MARKER
User Text:
F6:CLOCK
002:[TEXT:F2:STARTUP
Fixed Text: ABCDE
F3:HOST
F7:PASSWORD
003:[
F4:SERIAL 2
004:[
Note: If given a choice, use the highest possible
value. Transmission distances greater
than 50 ft. (25 ft. for 19200 baud) may
require a modem or a lower baud rate
selection.
005:[
PARITY identifies an extra bit at the end of a
message that checks for problems in the data
transmission. The Parity parameter must be set to
match the value required by the connected device.
HOST:
COMM
PROT
PROG
]
]
]
]
]
ECHO
Baud
< 19200>
Parity
<NONE>
Bits
<8>
Stop Bits <1>
BITS must be set to match the value required by
the connected device.
STOP BITS represent the space between characters
as they are sent during a transmission. The Stop Bits
parameter must be set to match the value required
by the connected device.
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Set each of the primary communication parameters as
required for your application.
 Press TAB to select the parameter.
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired setting, then press ENTER.
 Proceed to the following section, as applicable, to
configure the remaining host communication properties.

Programmable Protocol Parameters
or

Extended Protocol Parameters
82350-
3-19
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.9.2 Programmable Protocol Parameters
Programmable Protocol is used to communicate with devices where one-way communication is required. It provides no error
checking or acknowledgment of the transmitted data.
Perform the following procedures to configure the Comm 1
interface for use with Programmable Protocol.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
 Press F4 PROPERTIES to select Properties menu.
 Press F3 HOST to access the Host Screen.
The Host parameters are displayed on four pages
(Comm, Protocol, Programmable, and Echo).
The first page (COMM) provides the basic communication
parameters required for all Host interfaces. See Primary
Communication Parameters for details.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE
F4:MARKER AUX
F5:SETUP
SETUP:
Properties
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:MARKER
F5:ETHERNET
*001:[TEXT:F2:STARTUP
User Text:
]
F6:CLOCK
002:[TEXT:F3:Fixed
]
HOST Text: ABCDE
F7:PASSWORD
003:[
]
F4:SERIAL 2
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press PAGE DOWN until the Protocol Screen is
displayed.
The second page (PROT) allows you to select the
protocol and communication type you intend to use.
 Verify the cursor is on the Protocol parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Protocol parameter identifies how your marker
will pass information to and from other serial devices.
HOST:
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until PROGRAM
COMM
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<PROGRAM >
Type:
<232>
485 RxTx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
is displayed.
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
HOST:
COMM
 Press TAB to select the Type parameter.
The Type parameter identifies the serial format you
intend to use (RS232 or RS485).
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until 232 is
displayed.
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<PROGRAM >
Type:
<232>
485 RxTx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
Note: RS-485 should not be selected when
Programmable Protocol is used. For RS-485
applications, refer to Extended Protocol.
Ignore the 485 RxTx Delay parameter
when configuring RS232 communications.
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
HOST:
COMM
 Press TAB to select the ID parameter.
Note: The ID parameter is typically used only with
Extended Protocol and RS-485 to identify
multiple, networked controllers.
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<PROGRAM >
Type:
<232>
485 RxTx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
 Verify the ID parameter value is set to zero (0).
If not, type "0" in the text box.
F1 SAVE
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
3-20
PROT
82350-
F2 DEFAULTS
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Programmable Protocol Parameters (continued)
The third page (PROG) allows you to define which characters to extract from the transmitted data string and how to process
the data during marker operations. See Programmable Protocol Examples for illustrations on using these features.
NOTE
The host message may contain ASCII characters that define the Start
Character, the Terminator, and the Ignore Character within the transmitted
data string. To identify these ASCII characters, you must specify their decimal
equivalents when setting up the following parameters. Refer to Appendix B:
ASCII Character Cross Reference to view decimal and hexadecimal equivalents
of ASCII characters.
Start Char identifies the decimal equivalent of the
ASCII character in the host message where the
marking system should begin to count character
positions. (e.g., decimal 0 = no starting character or
decimal 2 = ASCII Start of Text)
HOST:
COMM
PROT
Start Char:[0 ]
Position :[1 ]
Ignore
:[10 ]
Terminator identifies the decimal equivalent of the
ASCII character in the host message that signals the
end of the string. The terminator is usually a carriage
return. (e.g., decimal 13 = ASCII Carriage Return)
F1 SAVE
Position identifies the physical position in the data
string where the marking system will begin to
extract data from the host message. This position is
relative to the Start Character position (if used).
PROG
ECHO
Terminator:[13 ]
Length
:[0 ]
Msg Type :[V ]
F2 DEFAULTS
Length identifies the number of characters to extract from the host message. The system used the Position
parameter and Length parameter determine which characters to extract from the host message. Note: This parameter
is optional when a Terminator (see above) is used in the host message.
Ignore identifies the decimal equivalent of the ASCII character in the host message that the marking system should
ignore. (e.g., decimal 10 = ASCII Line Feed)
Msg Type defines how the marking system will use the data it extracts from the host message. Valid message types
are: P, V, 1, Q, and 0 (zero).
P
loads a specific pattern using the pattern name extracted from the host message.
V
updates the first variable text field of the pattern with data extracted from the host message.
1 overwrites the content of the first text field in the pattern with data extracted from the host message.
Note that if the field contains message flags, the flags will overwritten (deleted), not updated.
Q
updates the text in the first query text buffer with data extracted from the host message.
0 (zero) indicates that the host message will provide the message type, field number (if applicable), and data. This
option allows more flexibility by delegating the message type selection to the host on a message-by-message
basis. The host message must use the format Tnn<string> where:
T
nn
= P, V, 1, or Q to indicate the message type.
= two-digit number to indicate the field number (01 through 99) or
query text buffer (01 through 20) where the data will be placed.
Note: Do not specify a number with Message Type P.
<string> = pattern name (Message Type P) or field data (Message Types V, 1, or Q), as applicable.
 Set each of the programmable protocol parameters as required for your application.
 Press TAB to select the parameter.
 Type the appropriate value in the text box.
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
82350-
3-21
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Programmable Protocol Parameters (continued)
The fourth page (ECHO) allows you to enable and configure the Echo feature. The Echo feature allows you to send (echo) a
message string (from the controller COMM 1 port) after the pattern is printed. The Echo feature constructs the transmitted
(echoed) message using ASCII characters and special parse flags to extract data from the pattern.
 Verify the cursor is on the Echo parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
HOST:
COMM
PROT
PROG
Echo :
String:
<
[
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
ECHO
 Press ENTER to toggle the Echo option ON or OFF.
< > indicates Echo is disabled.
< * > indicates Echo is enabled.
 Press TAB to select the String parameter.
>
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
HOST:
COMM PROT
PROG
ECHO
SUPV –Offline–
Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
The String parameter defines the data you wish to
echo to the COMM 1 port.
The String text box can hold up to 50 characters
(data characters, format characters, literals, and
parse flags). However, the echoed string can
contain up to 100 characters after formatting and
text substitution (including control characters like
ASCII carriage returns and line feeds).
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
Echo
:
< Fixed
>
002:[TEXT:
Text: ABCDE
String:
[
003:[
004:[
005:[
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
]
]
]
]
]
]
 Type the desired echo string in the text box.
See examples, below.




JOG:
X/Y
Z THETA
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
Use parse flag %#Q to echo a specific field in the pattern,
SUPV –Offline–
Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
Resolution:
<COARSE
>
where # represents the field number 01 through 999.
Theta: [ 0.0000]degrees
Use parse flag %###C to echo a single ASCII character,*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
where ### is the decimal equivalent of the ASCII character.
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
Refer to Appendix B: ASCII Character Cross Reference for 003:[
details.
]
004:[
]
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
Use the switch \r (or \R) to echo an ASCII carriage return.
005:[
]
Use the switch \n (or \N) to echo an ASCII carriage return and an ASCII line feed.
HOST:
COMM PROT PROG ECHO
Examples: Suppose the pattern printed field 01, field 02, and field 03 as: SN:2008 247-14:06
If the String parameter is defined as:
The data echoed out of the COMM 1 port would be:
If the String parameter is defined as:
The data echoed out of the COMM 1 port would be:
 To SAVE the Host Properties settings, press F1 (SAVE).
 To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.
TELESIS
JOG:
X/Y Protocol:
Z THETA<PROGRAM >
[ D A T A = % 1 Q ; %Type:
2 Q % 1 3 C % 1<232>
0C ]
Resolution:
<COARSE
>
Id:
[0
D A T A = S N : 2 0 0 8 ; 2 4 7 - 1 4 : 0]6 < C R > < L F >
Theta: [ 0.0000]degrees
[DATA=%2Q;%3Q%\R
]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
DATA=247-14:06; TELESIS<CR>
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
HOST:
COMM PROT
PROG ECHO
SUPV –Offline–
Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
Protocol:
<PROGRAM >
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
<232>
 To RESET ALL Host Properties settings to their default settings: 002:[TEXT:Type:
Fixed Text:
ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
F1 SAVE
 Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
 Press F1 (SAVE)
Id:
[0 ]
F2 DEFAULTS
]
]
]
]
]
JOG:
X/Y
Z THETA
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
Resolution:
<COARSE
>
Theta: [ 0.0000]degrees
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
003:[
]
004:[
]
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
005:[
]
3-22
82350-
HOST:
COMM
PROT
PROG
ECHO
JOG:
X/Y
Z ]THETA Terminator:[13 ]
Start Char:[0
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.9.3 Programmable Protocol Examples
This section illustrates the use of the various message types used with Programmable Protocol communications.
The Programmable Protocol parameters define which
characters to extract from the data string transmitted
from the host and how to use the data it extracts.
The Position parameter identifies the location in the
string of the first character you wish to extract.
HOST:
The remaining data to be extracted can be identifying by
naming a terminator character (where to stop extracting),
or by defining the length of the string (total number of
characters to extract). See examples below.
Start Char:[0 ]
Position :[1 ]
Ignore
:[10 ]
The Message Type parameter tells the software how to use
the data it extracts – load a pattern (P), update a text field
(V or 1), or update a query buffer (Q). When you use one
of these message types, the system will process all data
extracted in the same manner until you change the
message type setting.
F1 SAVE
COMM
PROT
PROG
Terminator:[13 ]
Length
:[0 ]
Msg Type :[see examples]
F2 DEFAULTS
These parameters tell the
software which characters to
extract from the transmitted string.
Message Type 0 (zero) allows the host to specify how to
use the data. Message Type 0 allows more flexibility
because you can change message types with each
transmitted string if you wish. See example Message Type
Defined By Host.
ECHO
This parameter tells
the software how to
use the extracted data.
Data Defined By Terminator
In this example, we will use the default Programmable Protocol parameter settings:






Start Character = 0 (i.e., no starting character)
Terminator Character = 13 (ASCII Carriage Return)
Position = 1 (start extracting from first character)
Length = 0* (total number of characters to extract)
Ignore Character = 10 (ASCII Line Feed)
Message Type (see examples, below)
*Note: If the Length parameter is set to zero, the software extracts data until it encounters the terminator character.
Let’s assume the transmitted string looks like this:
Character Position:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
Transmitted String:
E
X
A
M
P
L
E
1
<CR>
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
The system will start extracting characters from the transmitted string at position 1 and stop when it reaches the terminator
character (CR). In this example, the system will extract the string: EXAMPLE1.
The system will use the extracted string in one of these ways, depending on the selected Message Type:
Message Type P: The system looks in controller memory for a pattern named EXAMPLE1. If the pattern exists, the
system will automatically load (open) the pattern. If the pattern does not exist, the system will issue an error message.
Message Type V: The system updates the first variable text flag (%V) in the pattern with the text (EXAMPLE1). If the
variable text field is defined to hold less than the number of characters extracted (say %6V), the system will truncate
the extracted text when it inserts it into the field (e.g., EXAMPL). Ensure the variable text field is sufficiently defined to
accept all characters extracted from the transmitted string.
Message Type 1: The system inserts the text (EXAMPLE1) into the first text-based object in the pattern. Text-based
objects include Text fields and Arc Text fields. Any data already residing in the text-based field will be overwritten by the
extracted data. Note that if the field contains a variable text flag, the flag will also be overwritten (not updated). Compare
this result with Message Type V, above.
Message Type Q: The system inserts the text (EXAMPLE1) into the first query text buffer. Any data already residing in
the buffer will be overwritten by the extracted data.
82350-
3-23
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Programmable Protocol Examples (continued)
Data Defined By Length
In this example, we will change the Programmable Protocol parameter settings to define the data string in terms of its
length. We’ll also define a Start Character and include an Ignore character in the transmitted string to show how the system
handles them.


Start Character = 2 (ASCII STX character)
HOST:




Terminator Character = 13* (ASCII Carriage
Return)
Position = 5 (start extracting from fifth character)
Start Char:[2 ]
Position :[5 ]
Ignore
:[10 ]
Length = 8* (extract a total of 8 characters)
Ignore Character = 10 (ASCII Line Feed)
COMM
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Terminator:[13 ]
Length
:[8 ]
Msg Type :[see examples]
Message Type (see examples, below)
F1 SAVE
*Note: Since we are using the Length parameter,
characters beyond the specified length and up
to the terminator character will be ignored.
F2 DEFAULTS
Let’s assume the transmitted string looks like this:
Character Position:
Transmitted String:
<STX>
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
T
E
S
T
E
X
A
M
P
L
E
<LF>
2
[
T
W
0
]
<CR>
The STX character identifies the start of the string. Position #1 begins immediately after the STX character.
The Carriage Return (CR) identifies the end of the string. However, we have instructed the system to extract only eight (8)
characters starting at position 5. In this example, the system will extract the string: EXAMPLE2.
Note that the characters before position 5 (TEST), the Line Feed character (LF), and the remaining characters in the string
([TWO]) are ignored.
The system will use the extracted string in one of these ways, depending on the selected Message Type:
Message Type P: The system looks in controller memory for a pattern named EXAMPLE2. If the pattern exists, the
system will automatically load (open) the pattern. If the pattern does not exist, the system will issue an error message.
Message Type V: The system updates the first variable text flag (%V) in the pattern with the text (EXAMPLE2). If the
variable text field is defined to hold less than the number of characters extracted (say %6V), the system will truncate
the extracted text when it inserts it into the field (e.g., EXAMPL). Ensure the variable text field is sufficiently defined to
accept all characters extracted from the transmitted string.
Message Type 1: If this message type is needed, please contact your Telesis representative for details.
Please use Message type V if possible.
Message Type Q: The system inserts the text (EXAMPLE2) into the first query text buffer. Any data already residing in
the buffer will be overwritten by the extracted data.
3-24
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Programmable Protocol Examples (continued)
Message Type Defined By Host
In this example, we will show how the transmitted string can be used to supply both the data and the message type.
Message Type 0 (zero) allows the host to specify how to use the data. This features allows more flexibility because you can
change message types with each transmitted string if you wish.
For simplicity, we will use the default Programmable Protocol parameter settings. The only difference is setting the Message
Type parameter to 0 (zero).






Start Character = 0 (ASCII NULL, i.e., no start
character)
HOST:
Terminator Character = 13 (ASCII Carriage Return)
COMM
PROT
Start Char:[0 ]
Position :[1 ]
Ignore
:[10 ]
Position = 1 (start extracting from first character)
Length = 0* (total number of characters to extract)
PROG
ECHO
Terminator:[13 ]
Length
:[0 ]
Msg Type :[0 ]
Ignore Character = 10 (ASCII Line Feed)
Message Type = 0 (i.e., the Host will supply the
type)
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
*Note: If the Length parameter is set to zero, the software extracts data until it encounters the terminator character.
The examples that follow show how each host-supplied message type and data is used by the system.
Load a Pattern
The transmitted string may look like this:
Character Position:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
Transmitted String:
P
E
X
A
M
P
L
E
3
<CR>
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
The system will start extracting characters from the transmitted string at position 1 and stop when it reaches the terminator
character (CR). In this example, the system will extract the string: PEXAMPLE3.
The first character (P) identifies the Message Type. The remaining characters identify the name of the pattern. The system
looks in controller memory for a pattern named EXAMPLE3. If the pattern exists, the system will automatically load (open)
the pattern. If the pattern does not exist, the system will issue an error message.
Update a Specific Variable Text Field
The transmitted string may look like this:
Character Position:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Transmitted String:
V
0
2
E
X
A
M
P
L
E
4
<CR>
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
The system will start extracting characters from the transmitted string at position 1 and stop when it reaches the terminator
character (CR). In this example, the system will extract the string: V02EXAMPLE4.
The first character (V) identifies the Message Type. The next two characters (02) identify the variable text field in the
pattern that you wish to update (in this example, the second variable text field). The remaining characters (EXAMPLE4)
identify the data.
The system updates the specified variable text flag (%V) in the pattern with the string (EXAMPLE4). If the variable text field
is defined to hold less than the number of characters extracted (say %6V), the system will truncate the extracted text when
it inserts it into the field (e.g., EXAMPL). Ensure the variable text field is sufficiently defined to accept all characters
extracted from the transmitted string.
Note that when the Message Type parameter (on the Host Screen, above) is set to V, the system always updates the first
variable text field in the pattern. However, when the Message Type parameter is set to 0 (zero) and the host supplies the
message type within the transmitted string, it can identify a specific variable text field to update.
82350-
3-25
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Programmable Protocol Examples (continued)
Update a Specific Query Text Buffer
The transmitted string may look like this:
Character Position:
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
Transmitted String:
Q
0
4
E
X
A
M
P
L
E
6
<CR>
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
The system will start extracting characters from the transmitted string at position 1 and stop when it reaches the terminator
character (CR). In this example, the system will extract the string: Q04EXAMPLE6.
The first character (Q) identifies the Message Type. The next two characters (04) identify the Query Text Buffer you wish to
update (in this example, the fourth buffer). The remaining characters (EXAMPLE6) identify the data.
The system inserts the string (EXAMPLE6) into the specified query text buffer. Any data already residing in the buffer will be
overwritten by the extracted data.
Note that when the Message Type parameter (on the Host Screen, above) is set to Q, the system always updates the first
query text buffer. However, when the Message Type parameter is set to 0 (zero) and the host supplies the message type
within the transmitted string, it can identify a specific buffer to update.
3-26
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.9.4 Extended Protocol Parameters
Extended Protocol provides two-way communication with error checking. It is designed to provide secure communications
with an intelligent host device using pre-defined message formats, response formats, and message types. It also provides
hand-shaking to detect faults in the transmitted messages, effectively verifying the data is properly received. See Extended
Protocol Examples for illustrations on using these features.
Extended Protocol allows for multi-drop communications so that the multiple markers may be networked through a host
computer. If Extended Protocol is chosen, you may use up to 31 markers controlled by one host computer using RS-485
communications. All communications are carried out in a parent/child relationship. Only the host has the ability to initiate
communications. The marker communicates only in response.
Perform the following procedures to configure the Comm 1 interface for use with Extended Protocol.
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F4 PROPERTIES to select properties menu.
 Press F3 HOST to access the Host Screen.
The Host parameters are displayed on four pages
(Comm, Protocol, Programmable, and Echo).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE
F4:MARKER F5AUX
:SETUP
SETUP:
Properties
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
The first page (COMM) provides the basic communication
parameters required for all Host interfaces. See Primary
Communication Parameters for details.
F1:MARKER
F5:ETHERNET
*001:[TEXT: User
Text:
]
F2:STARTUP
F6:CLOCK
002:[TEXT: Fixed
F3:HOSTText: ABCDEF7:PASSWORD ]
003:[
]
F4:SERIAL 2
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press PAGE DOWN until the Protocol Screen is displayed.
 Verify the cursor is on the Protocol parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Protocol parameter identifies how your marker will
pass information to and from other serial devices.
HOST
:
COMM
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<EXTENDED>
Type:
<232>
485 RxTx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until EXTENDED
is displayed.
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
HOST:
COMM
 Press TAB to select the Type parameter.
The Type parameter identifies the serial format you
intend to use (RS232 or RS485). You must choose RS485 if more than one controller is connected in a multidrop network. See ID parameter (below).
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until the desired
format type is displayed.
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<EXTENDED>
Type:
<232>
485 RxTx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
F1 SAVE
82350-
PROT
F2 DEFAULTS
3-27
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Extended Protocol Parameters (continued)
 Press TAB to select the 485 RxTx Delay parameter.
Since RS485 communications transmit and receive
signals on the same line, a delay is required to
manage the signal traffic. This parameter defines
the delay between transmissions, thus allowing
time for the port to switch from receive-mode to
transmit-mode, and vice versa.
HOST:
COMM
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<EXTENDED>
Type:
<485>
485 RxTx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[0 ]
 Type the desired delay (in milliseconds) in the text
F1 SAVE
box. Set the value to match the customer-supplied
RS485 device.
F2 DEFAULTS
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
This parameter is typically used to identify a controller when multiple controllers are connected in a multi-drop
network. Each controller must be identified by a unique ID number
(0 through
*001:[TEXT:
User31).
Text:
]
Fixed
Text:ID
ABCDE
]
The host may download a message and direct it to a particular 002:[TEXT:
controller. The
station
is sent at the beginning
of a
003:[ the message.
]
message and only the controller with that station ID number receives
004:[
]
Type the station ID for this controller in the text box.
005:[
]
You must use ID zero (0) if only one controller is used.
 Press TAB to select the ID parameter.

 To SAVE the Host Properties settings, press F1
(SAVE).
HOST:
 To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.
COMM
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol:
<EXTENDED>
Type:
<485>
485 RxTx Delay: [3 ]ms
Id:
[1 ]
 To RESET ALL Host Properties settings to their
default settings:
 Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
 Press F1 (SAVE)
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
3-28
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.9.5 Extended Protocol Examples
The following sections illustrate the use of message formats, response formats, message types, and block check code (BCC)
calculations used with Extended Protocol communications.
Message Format
Messages from the host to the controller are transmitted in the following format:
SOH TYPE [##] STX [DATA] ETX [BCC] CR
where:
SOH
ASCII Start of Header character (001H). The marking system ignores all characters received prior to the
SOH.
TYPE
A single printable ASCII character that defines the message type of the current message.
See Message Types (below) for details.
[##]


Two ASCII decimal digits that specify the Station ID number of the controller.
If only one controller is used, the Station ID may be eliminated and "00" will be assumed.
For multi-drop network applications that use more than one controller, the Station ID uniquely identifies the
individual controllers (from 01 to 31).
STX
ASCII Start of Text character (002H).
[DATA]
This field contains the actual data of the message. This field is required for certain types of messages. See
Message Types (below) for details.
ETX
ASCII End of Text character (003H).
[BCC]
A Block Check Code (BCC) generated and sent to improve link reliability by providing fault detection.
CR
ASCII Carriage Return character (00DH).
Response Format
The controller may respond to the host in one of two ways.
If the host transmission is error free, the controller responds with an acknowledge (ACK) message in the form:
SOH TYPE [##] ACK STX [DATA] ETX BCC CR
If an error is encountered, the controller responds with a negative-acknowledge (NAK) message in the form:
SOH TYPE [##] NAK STX [DATA] ETX BCC CR
where:
SOH
ASCII Start of Header character (001H).
TYPE
The Type returned is the same message type as sent by the host.
[##]
The Station ID number of the responding controller.
The ID should match the Station ID of the host message. If the controller ID is "00", it is not sent.
ACK
ASCII Acknowledge character (006H). Sent if the message was received in the correct format with no errors.
Note: This only acknowledges that the communication link was successful. This does not indicate that the
requested action was successfully completed.
NAK
ASCII Negative-Acknowledge character (015H). Sent if the message was received with an error.
82350-
3-29
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Extended Protocol Examples (continued)
STX
ASCII Start of Text character (002H).
[DATA] A conditional text string that may be returned for certain message types that request a response (e.g.,
Message Type I or S). See Message Types (below) for details.
ETX
ASCII End of Text character (003H).
[BCC]
A Block Check Code (BCC) generated and sent to improve link reliability by providing fault detection.
CR
ASCII Carriage Return character (00DH).
 Key Point…
If the host does not receive a response from the controller within three seconds, the host should
transmit the original message again. If no response is received after three tries, the host should abort
the sequence and declare the link to be down.
Message Types
The following message types may be used with Extended Protocol.
Type 1
If this message type is needed, please contact your Telesis representative for details.
Please use Message type V if possible.
Type G
This type of message allows the host to initiate a print cycle. Use the format:
SOH G STX ETX [BCC] CR
Type I
This message type requests the controller return the status of standard output and input signals.
Use the format:
SOH
I STX ETX [BCC] CR
The controller will return a hexadecimal code for the 6 output signals and 12 input signals
in the following format:
OO;III
where:
bit 1
bit 2
bit 3
bit 4
bit 5
bit 6
bit 1
bit 2
bit 3
bit 4
bit 5
bit 6
bit 7
bit 8
bit 9
bit 10
bit 11
bit 12
3-30
READY
DONE
PAUSED
NO_FAULT
SPARE_1
SPARE_2
0x01
0x02
0x04
0x08
0x10
0x20
START
STOP
SEL_0
SEL_1
SEL_2
SEL_3
SEL_6 *
SEL_4
SEL_5
SPARE_1
SPARE_2
SPARE_3
0x001
0x002
0x004
0x008
0x010
0x020
0x040
0x080
0x100
0x200
0x400
0x800
* may be configured to place machine online (default) or for Remote Pattern Selection.
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Extended Protocol Examples (continued)
Type O
This type of message places the machine online. This allows a marking system that is unattended to recover
from a power outage by supplying the online command from the host. Use the format:
SOH O STX ETX [BCC] CR
Type P
This type of message can be used to supply the system with data or to poll the system for information.
Supplying Data. When used to supply data, the host sends the name of the pattern to be loaded.
To supply a pattern name for loading, use the format:
SOH P STX <string> ETX [BCC] CR
where:
P
=
<string> =
message type
name of the pattern to be loaded (the pattern must already exist in controller)
Polling Data. When used to poll for data, this message type requests the name of the pattern currently
loaded in the controller.
To poll the controller for the current pattern name, use one of these formats:
SOH P STX ? ETX [BCC] CR
or
SOH P STX ETX [BCC] CR
where:
Type Q
P
?
=
=
message type
(optional) request for current pattern name
This type of message updates text in the specified query text buffer with the data sent from the host.
To supply data to a specific query text buffer, use the format:
SOH Q STX nn<string> ETX [BCC] CR
where:
Q
=
nn
=
<string> =
message type
buffer number in query text lookup table (leading zero required for 01 through 09)
data that will be inserted into the specified buffer
82350-
3-31
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Extended Protocol Examples (continued)
Type S
This message type requests the error status of the marking system. Use the format:
SOH
S STX ETX [BCC] CR
The controller will return a value that represents a particular type of error. Each error type has one or more
messages that may be displayed on the controller when an error occurs. Refer to the following table.
For details on error messages, their possible causes and resolutions refer to Chapter 4 System Messages.
3-32
Returned
Value
TYPE OF ERROR
Displayed Error Message(s)
0x0000
(no error)
0x0001
ONLINE_ERROR
Timeout… Cannot Find Home Position!
0x0002
PATTERN_LOAD_ERROR
Error Loading Pattern (Host)!
Pattern Not Found (Host) : <pattern_name>
0x0004
DISALLOWED_NO_PATTERN
No Pattern is Loaded!
No Pattern is Loaded for Print!
No Pattern Loaded. Pre-position What?
0x0008
DISALLOWED_OFFLINE
Disallowed! Marker is Offline!
Denied! Marker is Offline!
Cannot Park on Load! Marker is Offline!
0x0010
PATTERN_FIELD_ERROR
Variable Text Not Found!
Text / ArcText Field Not Found!
0x0020
MARKER_ABORTED_ERROR
Marker Has Been Aborted!
0x0040
(not used)
0x0080
PIX_OUT_OF_RANGE_ERROR
Pattern Pixel Range Error!
Field <number> – Range Error!
0x0100
RAM_ERROR
Ram Error… Default Parameters Loaded!
Ram Error… Existing Patterns Erased!
0x0200
SN_RANGE_ERROR
Error! Serial Number Range Warning!
0x0400
(not used)
0x0800
OVER_TEMP_ERROR
Marker Aborted! OVER TEMPERATURE Fault
or
Error! OVER TEMPERATURE Fault detected
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Extended Protocol Examples (continued)
Type V
This type of message can be used to supply the system with data or to poll the system for information.
Supplying Data. When used to supply data, this message type updates the variable text in the specified field
with the data sent from the host. The specified field must contain a variable text flag (%#V or %#v). To avoid
data truncation, the data supplied to each field must be compatible with the maximum number of characters
allowed for that field.
You may supply data to a single variable text field or to multiple variable text fields. See examples below.


When supplying data to multiple fields:
If you attempt to supply data to more variable text fields than exist in the pattern,
the extra data will be ignored.
If you supply data for fewer variable text fields than exist in the pattern,
the extra variable text fields will be cleared of their data (but will retain their variable text flags).
Single Field. To supply data to a single variable text field, use the format
SOH V STX nn<string> ETX [BCC] CR
where:
V
=
nn
=
<string> =
message type
field number in pattern (leading zero required fields 01 through 09)
data that will be inserted into the specified field
Multiple Fields. To supply data to multiple variable text fields, use the format
SOH V STX !<string>|<string> ETX [BCC] CR
where:
V
=
!
=
<string1> =
|
=
<string2> =
message type
command for multiple fields
data that will be inserted into the 1st field containing variable text flag
field data separator
data that will be inserted into the 2nd field containing variable text flag
Polling Data. When used to poll for data, this message type requests the user-supplied text that is
contained in a specific variable text field. And it also is a useful tool to ensure a particular pattern is loaded
or to ensure that the variable text sent has been received.
Suppose a field contains both fixed text and variable text (e.g., MODEL %5V), and the user has supplied the
text “12345”. This message type will return only the value of the user-supplied text “12345”.
To poll the data in a specific field, use the format
SOH V STX ?nn ETX [BCC] CR
where:
V
?
nn
=
=
=
message type
request for user-supplied text
field number in pattern (a leading zero is required for fields 01 through 09)
82350-
3-33
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Block Check Code
A Block Check Code (BCC) is calculated by performing eight-bit-addition of the TYPE and DATA characters in the transmitted
string and encoding the result as a three-digit ASCII decimal number (000 to 255). If the sum is greater than 255, the most
significant bit overflows and is discarded. If the host is incapable of generating the BCC, it may be omitted at the risk of
undetected transmission errors.
The following is an example of a typical transmission that includes the Block Check Code calculation:
To download the character string "ABC123" for marking in the first field on the next item, you must wait until the current
marking cycle is complete.
The host sends the following message. (Note that all data is shown in hexadecimal).
SOH 1 STX 01ABC123 ETX 238 CR
where:
1
01
ABC123
238
is the Message Type
is the field number
is the text string
is the Block Check Code (BCC)
The BCC is calculated as follows:
1.
2.
Add Message Type character + DATA characters (1+01+ABC123):
Character
Hex Value
1
0
1
A
B
C
1
2
3
031H
030H
031H
041H
042H
043H
031H
032H
033H
Description
Message Type
First digit of field number
Second digit of field number
First character of text string
Second character of text string
Third character of text string
Fourth character of text string
Fifth character of text string
Sixth character of text string
1EEH
BCC Sum
The system is only interested in the lower eight bits, so it discards the first digit of the sum and keeps the lower two,
resulting in a BCC of EE. It then converts the hexadecimal value to decimal:
EE hexadecimal = 238 decimal
3.
The decimal value is then converted into its equivalent ASCII representation (where 2=032H, 3=033H, and 8=038H).
This is the transmitted BCC. The actual data transmitted by the host for the entire message is (in hexadecimal):
001H 031H 002H 030H 031H 041H 042H 043H 031H 032H 033H 003H 032H 033H 038H 00DH
4.
The marking system will respond with a transmission of:
001H 031H 006H 002H 003H 030H 034H 039H 00DH
which equates to the following ASCII message:
SOH 1 ACK STX ETX 049 CR
Note that if the system had detected an error in receiving the message from the host, it would respond with a NAK (015H)
character in place of the ACK (006H). However, the BCC would be unaffected by this since the ACK/NAK character is not
included in the BCC calculation. Note also that this example does not include requested response data that would be returned
with certain message types (e.g., Type I or S).
3-34
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.10 SERIAL2 COMMUNICATION PROPERTIES
The Serial2 communication parameters allow you to configure the TMC470 Comm 2 port. The Comm 2 port is a serial
interface. It may be used to transmit data, select patterns for printing, and control marker operation via remote devices
such as host computers, terminals, or bar code scanners.
Only RS232 devices may be connected to the Comm 2 interface and they may use only Programmable Protocol.
Perform the following procedures to configure the Comm 2
interface communication parameters.
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
The system will display the Setup Menu.
 Press F4 PROPERTIES to select Properties menu.
 Press F4 SERIAL 2 to access the Host Screen.
The Host parameters are displayed on three pages
(Comm, Programmable, and Echo).
The first page (COMM) provides the primary
communication parameters required for all Host interfaces
connected to the Comm 2 serial port.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE
F4:MARKER AUX
F5:SETUP
SETUP:
Properties
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:MARKER
F5:ETHERNET
*001:[TEXT:F2:STARTUP
User Text:
]
F6:CLOCK
002:[TEXT:F3:HOST
Fixed Text: ABCDE
F7:PASSWORD ]
003:[
]
F4:SERIAL 2
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Verify the cursor is on Serial Tool check box.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Serial Tool must be enabled (ON) if you wish to
include Serial commands in your patterns.
 Press ENTER to toggle the option ON or OFF.
 indicates the Serial Tool is enabled.
 indicates the Serial Tool is disabled.
 Set each of the primary communication parameters as
required for your application.
HOST
 Press TAB to select the parameter.
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
SERIAL TOOL 
:
COMM
desired setting, then press ENTER.
BAUD defines the number of data bits
transferred per second. The Baud parameter
must be set to match the baud rate of the
connected device.
Note: If given a choice, use the highest
possible value. Transmission
distances greater than 50 ft. (25 ft.
for 19200 baud) may require a
modem or a lower baud rate
selection.
F1 SAVE
HOST
:
F1 SAVE
ECHO
Baud:
< 9600 >
Parity:
<NONE>
Bits:
<8>
Stop Bits:<1>
F2 DEFAULTS
COMM
SERIAL TOOL 
PARITY identifies an extra bit at the end of a
message that checks for problems in the data
transmission. The Parity parameter must be
set to match the value required by the
connected device.
PROT PROG
PROT PROG
ECHO
Baud:
< 9600 >
Parity:
<NONE>
Bits:
<8>
Stop Bits:<1>
F2 DEFAULTS
BITS must be set to match the value
required by the connected device.
STOP BITS represent the space between
characters as they are sent during a
transmission. The Stop Bits parameter must be
set to match the value required by the
connected device.
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
82350-
3-35
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
The Second page (PROT) allows you to choose the Protocol to be used. You have the option of Programmable or
NET232EX protocol.
Verify the cursor is on the Protocol parameter. If not, press
TAB to select it.
HOST :
The Protocol parameter identifies how your marker will
pass information to and from other serial devices.
COMM
PROT
Protocol:
PROG
ECHO
< PROGRAM >
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until the desired
option is displayed. ( PROGRAM or NET232EX)
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
The third page (PROG) allows you to define which characters to extract from the transmitted data string and how to process
the data during marker operations. See Programmable Protocol Examples for illustrations on using these features.
NOTE
The host message may contain ASCII characters that define the Start
Character, the Terminator, and the Ignore Character within the transmitted
data string. To identify these ASCII characters, you must specify their decimal
equivalents when setting up the following parameters. Refer to Appendix B:
ASCII Character Cross Reference to view decimal and hexadecimal equivalents
of ASCII characters.
Start Char identifies the decimal equivalent of the ASCII
character in the host message where the marking system
should begin to count character positions. (e.g., decimal 0
= no starting character or decimal 2 = ASCII Start of Text)
Terminator identifies the decimal equivalent of the ASCII
character in the host message that signals the end of the
string. The terminator is usually a carriage return. (e.g.,
decimal 13 = ASCII Carriage Return)
HOST 2:
COMM
PROT
Start Char:[0 ]
Position :[1 ]
Ignore
:[10 ]
PROG
ECHO
Terminator:[13 ]
Length
:[0 ]
Msg Type :[T ]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Position identifies the physical position in the data string
where the marking system will begin to extract data from the host message.
Length identifies the number of characters to extract from the host message. The system used the Position parameter
and Length parameter determine which characters to extract from the host message. Note: This parameter is optional
when a Terminator (see above) is used in the host message.
Ignore identifies the decimal equivalent of the ASCII character in the host message that the marking system should
ignore. (e.g., decimal 10 = ASCII Line Feed)
Msg Type defines how the marking system will use the data it extracts from the host message. Valid message types
are: P, V, 1, Q, and 0 (zero).
P
loads a specific pattern using the pattern name extracted from the host message.
V
updates the first variable text field of the pattern with data extracted from the host message.
1 If this message type is needed, please contact your Telesis representative for details.
Please use Message type V if possible.
Q
updates the text in the first query text buffer with data extracted from the host message.
T
retrieves the response from the Response buffer for the Serial command in the pattern.
0 (zero) indicates that the host message will provide the message type, field number (if applicable), and data. This
option allows more flexibility by delegating the message type selection to the host on a message-by-message
basis. The host message must use the format Tnn<string> where:
T
nn
= P, V, 1, or Q to indicate the message type.
= two-digit number to indicate the field number (01 through 99) or
query text buffer (01 through 20) where the data will be placed.
Note: Do not specify a number with Message Type P.
<string> = pattern name (Message Type P) or field data (Message Types V, 1, or Q), as applicable.
3-36
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
 Set each of the programmable protocol parameters as required for your application.
 Press TAB to select the parameter.
 Type the appropriate value in the text box.
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The fourth page (ECHO) allows you to enable and configure the Echo feature. The Echo feature allows you to send (echo) a
message string (from the controller COMM 2 port) after the pattern is printed. The Echo feature constructs the transmitted
(echoed) message using ASCII characters and special parse flags to extract data from the pattern.
 Verify the cursor is on the Echo parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
HOST:
COMM
PROT
Echo :
String:
<
[
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
PROG
ECHO
 Press ENTER to toggle the Echo option ON or OFF.
< > indicates Echo is disabled.
< * > indicates Echo is enabled.
>
]
 Press TAB to select the String parameter.
The String parameter defines the data you wish to
echo to the COMM 2 port.
The String text box can hold up to 50 characters
(data characters, format characters, literals, and
parse flags). However, the echoed string can
contain up to 100 characters after formatting and
text substitution (including control characters like
ASCII carriage returns and line feeds).
F
1:FILE F2:EDIT
:MACHINE
F4:MARKER
HOST:
COMM F3PROT
PROG
ECHO F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
*001:[TEXT:
Echo :
< User
> Text:
002:[TEXT:
String:
[ Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
F1005:[
SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Type the desired echo string in the text box.
]
]
]
]
]
See examples, below.




Use parse flag %#Q to echo a specific field in
the pattern,
where # represents the field number 01 through 999.
JOG:
Z F3THETA
F1:FILE X/Y
F2:EDIT
:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
Resolution: <COARSE >
Use parse flag %###C to echo a single ASCII character,
Theta:
[ 0.0000]degrees
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
]
where ### is the decimal equivalent of the ASCII character.
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
Refer to Appendix B: ASCII Character Cross Reference for 003:[
details.
]
004:[
]
Use the switch \r (or \R) to echo an ASCII carriage return.
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
005:[
]
Use the switch \n (or \N) to echo an ASCII carriage return and an ASCII line feed.
Examples: Suppose the pattern printed field 01, field 02, and field 03 as: SN:2008 247-14:06 TELESIS
HOST:
COMM PROT PROG ECHO
JOG:
X/Y
Z THETA
If the String parameter is defined as:
[ D A T A = % 1 Q ; %Protocol:
2 Q % 1 3 C % 1<PROGRAM
0C ] >
Type:
<232>
<COARSE
The data echoed out of the COMM 2 port would be:
D AResolution:
TA=SN:2008
; 2 4 7 - 1>4 : 0 6 < C R > < L F >
Id:
[0 ]
Theta: [ 0.0000]degrees
If the String parameter is defined as:
[DATA=%2Q;%3Q%\R
]
The data echoed out of the COMM 2 port would be:
D A TFA
2 4 7 - 1 4F:
6; TELESIS<CR>
1 =SAVE
2 0DEFAULTS
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
 To SAVE the Serial2 Properties settings, press F1 (SAVE).
 To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.

F
1:FILE FCOMM
2:EDIT PROT
F3:MACHINE
:MARKER F5:SETUP
HOST:
PROG F4ECHO
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
To RESET ALL Serial2 Properties settings to their default settings:
Protocol: <PROGRAM >
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
]
Type:
<232>
Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
002:[TEXT:
Fixed Text:
]
Id:
[0 ]ABCDE
003:[
]
Press F1 (SAVE)
004:[
]
005:[
]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS


82350-
JOG:
Z F3THETA
F1:FILE X/Y
F2:EDIT
:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
Resolution: <COARSE >
Theta:
[ 0.0000]degrees
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
]
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
003:[
]
004:[
]
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
005:[
]
3-37
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.11 ETHERNET COMMUNICATION PROPERTIES
The Ethernet communication parameters allow you to configure the TMC470 Ethernet port for connecting the controller to a
remote device or application over a TCP/IP network.
NOTICE
Ensure the TMC470 Controller is properly connected to the host or the network, as
applicable. Refer to the TMC470 Installation & Maintenance Manual (see
Ethernet Connection) for critical details.
Note : The Green and Yellow LED’s show communication activity and are located on back of controller at the Ethernet
port.
·
Green – 100Mb
o Solid – a connection is made
o Flashing – a connection is made and there is ongoing communications
·
Yellow – 10Mb
o Solid – a connection is made
o Flashing – a connection is made and there is ongoing communications
If the activity happens at a faster rate than the fixed off time, the LED’s may remain off.
 Obtain the IP Address of the host computer.
 Turn the TMC470 on.
 Turn the PC on and allow Windows Explorer to complete its startup.
®
If the TMC470 is connected directly to the computer, this may take a few extra minutes while Windows®
prepares the network connections.
 Click the Start icon in the lower left corner of the Explorer window.
 Select All Programs > Accessories > Command Prompt.
 At the command prompt, type IPCONFIG and press ENTER.
 Record the following information:
IP Address:
____________________ (e.g., 010.001.0.140 or 169.254.211.247)
Subnet Mask: ____________________ (e.g., 255.255.0.0)
 At the command prompt, type EXIT and press ENTER.
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
The system will display the Setup Menu.
 Press F4 PROPERTIES to select properties menu.
 Press F5ETHERNET to access the Net Screen.
The Net parameters are displayed on two pages
(IP and Protocol).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE
F4:MARKER FAUX
5:SETUP
SETUP:
Properties
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:MARKER
F5:ETHERNET
*001:[TEXT: FUser
Text:
F6:CLOCK
2:STARTUP
002:[TEXT: FFixed
Text: ABCDE
F7:PASSWORD
3:HOST
003:[
F4:SERIAL 2
004:[
005:[
Ethernet Communication properties continued.
3-38
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
The first page (IP) provides parameters to identify the Controller on the TCP/IP network.
 Verify the cursor is on the Local IP parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Local IP parameter defines the Internet Protocol
(IP) address of the TMC470 Controller.
NET:
IP
PROT
Local IP: [010.000.000.031 ]
Remote IP: [010.000.000.035 ]
Subnet
: [255.000.000.000 ]
Port
: [2000 ]
STOP !
If you are connecting the TMC470 to a network hub
or a network switch, you must obtain a new Local IP
Address for the TMC470 Controller. Contact your
LAN administrator for details before continuing.
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
 Do one of the following, as applicable.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
In the Local IP text box, enter the IP Address obtained from your LAN administrator.
 Network Connection to Computer
or

*001:[TEXT: User Text:
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
Direct Connection to Computer
003:[
Locate the IP Address of the host computer (recorded above).004:[
e.g., 169.254.211.247
Add 1 to the last group of numbers in the IP Address.
e.g., 169.254.211.247+1
005:[
Enter the resulting number into the Local IP text box.
e.g., 169.254.211.248
 Press TAB to select the Remote IP parameter.
JOG:
The Remote IP parameter defines the IP address
where the TMC470 Controller will attempt to connect.
X/Y
Z
]
]
]
]
]
THETA
NET:
IP PROT
Resolution: <COARSE >
Theta: [ 0.0000]degrees
Local IP: [010.000.000.031 ]
Remote IP: [010.000.000.035 ]
Subnet
: [255.000.000.000 ]
Port
: [2000 ]
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
 Enter the IP Address that you recorded above into the
Remote IP text box.
For example: 010.001.0.140 or 169.254.211.247
Note: You may need to use ".000" instead of ".0".
F1 SAVE
HOST:
F2 DEFAULTS
COMM
PROT
PROG
ECHO
Protocol: <PROGRAM >
F1:FILE F2:EDIT
Type:F3:MACHINE
<232>F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV
–Offline–
:002
NET:
IP Id:
PROT Pattern:SAMPLE_02
[0 ]
 Press TAB to select the Subnet parameter.
The Subnet parameter defines the subnet mask
address of the network.
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
]
Local IP: [010.000.000.031
]
002:[TEXT:
Fixed Text: ABCDE]
]
Remote
F1 SAVEIP: F[010.000.000.035
2 DEFAULTS
003:[
]
Subnet
: [255.000.000.000 ]
004:[
]
Port
: [2000 ]
005:[
]
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 Enter the Subnet Mask that you recorded above into
the Subnet text box (e.g., 255.255.000.000).
For example: 255.255.000.000
Note: You may need to use ".000" instead of ".0".
 Make note of the Port parameter value: __________.
The Port parameter identifies the host socket
assigned to the marking system. This number must
be greater than or equal to 2000.
Note: If more than one marking system is installed
in a network configuration, each system
must use a separate and unique port
number.
82350-
JOG:
X/Y User
Z THETA
*001:[TEXT:
Text:
]
F002:[TEXT:
1:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE
F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
Fixed
Text: ABCDE
]
Resolution:
<COARSE
>
NET:
SUPV
IP PROT
Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
003:[ –Offline–
]
Theta:
004:[ [ 0.0000]degrees
]
Local
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
]
005:[ IP: [010.000.000.031
]]
Remote
002:[TEXT:
IP: [010.000.000.035
Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
]
Subnet
003:[
: [255.000.000.000 ]
]
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
004:[
]
Port
: [2000
]
005:[
]
JOG:
X/Y
Z THETA
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
HOST:
COMM PROT PROG ECHO
Resolution: <COARSE >
Theta: [ 0.0000]degrees
<PROGRAM >
JOG:
X/YProtocol:
Z THETA
Type:F3:MACHINE
<232>F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
F1:FILE F2:EDIT
Id:
[0 ]
Resolution:
SUPV –Offline–
<COARSE
Pattern:SAMPLE_02
>
:002
Theta: [ 0.0000]degrees
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F
1 SAVE
F2Fixed
DEFAULTS
002:[TEXT:
Text: ABCDE
]
003:[
]
HOST:
COMM PROT PROG ECHO
004:[
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
]
005:[
]
Start Char:[0 ]
Terminator:[13 ]
F
1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
Position
:[1 ]
Length
:[0 ]
SUPV
HOST: –Offline–
COMM
PROG
ECHO :[V ] :002
Ignore
:[10 PROT
]Pattern:SAMPLE_02
Msg Type
3-39
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
The second page (PROT) provides parameters to select
and
configure the protocol to be used with the TCP/IP
network.
NET:
 Verify the cursor is on the Protocol parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
The Protocol parameter identifies how the controller
will pass information to and from other devices on
the network.
IP
PROT
Protocol:
Type
:
< Bidirectional >
< Client >
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
Bidirectional protocol is reserved for custom
applications.

F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
Extended protocol provides two-way communication
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
with error checking. It is designed to provide secure
communications with an intelligent host device using
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
pre-defined message formats, response formats, and message types.
It also provides
002:[TEXT:
Fixed hand-shaking
Text: ABCDE to detect faults
] in the
transmitted messages, effectively verifying the data is properly received.
003:[ Refer to Extended Protocol Parameters]for details.
004:[
]
Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until the desired protocol is 005:[
displayed.
]
 Press TAB to select the Type parameter.
The Type parameter identifies the role of the
TMC470 Controller on the network.
JOG:
NET:
Client indicates the TMC470 will be used as a client
on the network and will attempt to connect to the
host at the Remote IP Address on the specified port
(socket).
Resolution: <COARSE >
Protocol:
< Bidirectional >
Theta:
[ 0.0000]degrees
Type
: < Client >
Server indicates the TMC470 will be used as a
server and will be listening for clients on the network
attempting to connect to its Local IP address.
X/Y
Z THETA
IP
PROT
F1 SAVE
HOST:
Disabled indicates the controller is not trying to
connect to a server on the network and is not
listening for a client on the network to connect.
F1 ACCEPT
F2 DEFAULTS
COMM
PROT
PROG
F2 GOTO
ECHO
F1:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE
F4:MARKER
F5:SETUP
Protocol:
<PROGRAM
>
SUPV –Offline–
:002
Type: Pattern:SAMPLE_02
<232>
Id:
[0 ]
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key until the desired format is *001:[TEXT:
displayed. User Text:



]
]
]
]
]
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
To SAVE the Ethernet Properties settings, press F1 (SAVE).
003:[
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
004:[
To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.
005:[
To RESET ALL Ethernet Properties settings to their default settings:
 Press F2 (DEFAULTS)
 Press F1 (SAVE)
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
JOG:
X/Y
Z THETA
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
Resolution:
>
002:[TEXT: <COARSE
Fixed Text:
ABCDE
Theta:
003:[ [ 0.0000]degrees
]
]
]
]
]
004:[
005:[
F1 ACCEPT
JOG:
X/Y
Z THETA
HOST:
COMM PROT PROG
F2 GOTO
ECHO
Resolution: <COARSE >
Protocol: <PROGRAM >
Theta: [ 0.0000]degrees
Type:
<232>
Id:
[0 ]
F1 SAVE
HOST:
3-40
82350-
F1 ACCEPT
F2 DEFAULTS
COMM
PROT
PROG
F2 GOTO
ECHO
F
1:FILEChar:[0
F2:EDIT F]3:MACHINE
F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
Start
Terminator:[13
]
SUPV
–Offline–
Position
:[1 ]Pattern:SAMPLE_02
Length
:[0 ]:002
Ignore
:[10 ]
Msg Type
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
:[V ]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.12 CLOCK AND CALENDAR PROPERTIES
Although the time and date parameters are set at the factory, you can adjust the system clock and calendar, as required.
The system uses the Clock parameters as source data when it inserts real-time information into the pattern. When the
system encounters a time or date flag in the pattern, it uses its internal clock/calendar to insert the appropriate time and
date into the text string.
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5
(SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F4 PROPERTIES to select Properties menu.
 Press F6 CLOCK to access the Clock Screen.
The Clock parameters are displayed on two
separate pages (Date and Time).
 Verify the cursor is on the Month parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT
F3:MACHINE
F4:MARKER F5AUX
:SETUP
SETUP:
Properties
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F1:MARKER
F5:ETHERNET
*001:[TEXT: User
Text:
]
F2:STARTUP
F8:CLOCK
002:[TEXT: Fixed
Text: ABCDEF7:PASSWORD ]
F3:HOST
003:[
]
F4:SERIAL 2
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Type the current month in the text box.
 Press TAB to select the Date parameter and enter
the current day of the month.
 Press TAB to select the Year parameter and enter
the current year.
 Press PAGE DOWN to display additional parameters.
 Verify the cursor is on the Hours parameter.
CLOCK:
If not, press TAB to select it.
Note: The Hours parameter is based on a
24-hour clock (e.g., 00=midnight,
01=1 a.m., 12=noon, 13=1 p.m., etc.).
DATE
TIME
Month:
Day:
Year:
[9 ]
[9 ]
[2010]
 Type the current hour of the day in the text box.
F1 SAVE
 Press TAB to select the Minutes parameter and enter
the current minutes.
 Press TAB to select the Seconds parameter and
enter the current seconds.
CLOCK:
 To SAVE the clock and calendar settings, press F1
(SAVE).
DATE
TIME
Hours:
[16]
Minutes: [58]
Seconds: [19]
 To CANCEL any changes you’ve made, press ESC.
F1 SAVE
82350-
3-41
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.13 UNITS OF MEASURE
 Key Point…
The units of measurement used by the system may be set by Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel.
The Units parameter allows you to select which units of measure (English or Metric) the system uses to define location
coordinates, size, distance and, for pneumatic markers, air pressure.
If you prefer, you can change the units to either English or Metric as follows.
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press
F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F73 DESIGN to selection Design menu.
 Press F1 UNITS to display the Marker Units Screen.
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to select the
desired units, then press ENTER.
ENGLISH configures the system to use inches and,
where applicable, pounds per square inch (psi).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SETUP: Design
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
METRIC configures the system to use millimeters
and, where applicable, bars.
F1:UNITS
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F :USER
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE2
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press F1 (SAVE) to save the units selection.
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
MARKER UNITS
*001:[TEXT:
Text: 
Units:User
English:
Metric: 
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
F1 SAVE
F2 DEFAULTS
004:[
005:[
3-42
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.14 ENABLE / DISABLE IMPACT PIN
 Key Point…
Both Designer-level and Supervisor-level personnel may enable and disable the marking pin for the system.
The impact pin must be enabled to print a pattern. If disabled, the marker will not fire the pin.
You can disable the pin to prevent the marker from being used or to test print a pattern without actually marking.
To disable (or re-enable) the impact pin:
 From the Designer (or Supervisor) Main Screen, press F4
(MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
 Press F2 PIN to select the pin mode.
F1: ENABLED allows the pin to be fired.
The pin must be enabled to a print pattern.
F2: DISABLED prevents the pin from being fired.
The system may be used to test a pattern and move
through the required motions, but the system will not
print while the pin is disabled.
F2:PIN
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
002:[TEXT:
FixedBACKUP
Text: ABCDE
F4:USB
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
MARKER-PIN
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 Key Point…
F1:DISABLED
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
F2:ENABLED
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
003:[
004:[
005:[
Initiating a print cycle with the pin disabled will
update the serial number parameter values. If
you wish to test print the pattern without
changing the parameter values, use the Dry Run
feature instead. Refer to Chapter 1 for details.
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
3-43
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.15 RESET SYSTEM PARAMETERS
The Manager Screen allows you to reset all system parameters to their default values.
CAUTION
The following procedure will reset the system parameters to their factory–
default settings. All parameters that have been specifically configured for your
system will be lost and unrecoverable.
NOTICE
The system must be placed in Supervisor mode to access the Manager Screen.
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F5 (SETUP).
The system will display the Setup menu.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline– Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
 F1:LEVEL
F2:QUERY TEXT
*001:[TEXT: User Text:
]
F3:DESIGN
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F4:PROPERTIES
003:[
]
F5:MANAGEMENT
004:[
]
005:[
]
 From the Setup menu, press F5 (MANAGEMENT).
The system will display the Manager Screen.
MANAGER(0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
F1-[QUERY
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F2-[HOST
]:08/20/09;15:53:21
F3-[HOST2
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F4-[HOST3
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F5-[NET
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F6 CLEAN F7 <PARAMS>
F8 SIZE
 Press F7 until the PARAMS selection is displayed.
MANAGER(0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
 Press F6 (CLEAN).
The system will prompt you to confirm your command.
 Do one of the following:
 Press F1 (YES) to restore the factory default settings.
or
 Press F2 (CANCEL) to withdraw the request.
 Press ESC to return to the Supervisor Main Screen.
3-44
82350-
F1-[QUERY
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F2-[HOST
]:08/20/09;15:53:21
F3-[HOST2
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F4-[HOST3
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F5-[NET
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F6 CLEAN F7 <PARAMS>
F8 SIZE
MANAGER(0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
F1-[QUERY
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
Delete parameters
and load defaults?
F2-[HOST
]:08/20/09;15:53:21
F3-[HOST2
F1]:08/20/09;13:53:21
-Yes F2-No
F4-[HOST3
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F5-[NET
]:08/20/09;13:53:21
F6 CLEAN F7 <PARAMS>
F8 SIZE
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.16 USING THE USB PORT
Using the TMC470 USB port, the system allows you to backup files from controller flash memory to a USB drive or restore
files from a USB drive to controller flash memory. Additionally, you may download a TSX file from a USB drive to upgrade
the controller firmware.
NOTICE
The TMC470 USB port is designed to work with a wide range of USB memory
devices (i.e., flash drives). However, there are some devices that will not
work. Additionally, the TMC470 USB port will not work with any USB device
that has software pre-loaded for use on a PC or any USB device that has
multiple partitions. Many USB drives have proprietary software which will
automatically run when the device is plugged in. In certain cases, those
devices can be erased or formatted using a PC and the device will then
operate.
The following is a sampling of devices which have been tested and have proven
to be compatible with the TMC470 Controller USB port:







DataWrite® 1GB Flash Drive
Lexar® 2GB Flash Drive
OCZ® ATV 8GB Flash Drive
PEAK® 1GB Flash Drive
PNY® Attaché 8GB Flash Drive
SONY® 8GB Flash Drive
Any USB drive provided by Telesis
 Key Points…
Ensure the USB flash drive contains no pre-loaded software.
Ensure the USB drive contains no partitions.
Remember – there is no directory structure in the TMC470 controller flash memory.
You must identify the target location on the USB drive first, before copying files from controller flash memory
You may copy (backup) pattern, block, font, and parameter files from controller flash memory to the USB drive.
You may copy (restore) pattern, block, font, and parameter files from the USB drive to controller flash memory.
You may create new directories on the USB drive.
You may delete directories and files from the USB drive.
You may delete only pattern files, block files, and font files from controller flash memory.
You cannot delete parameter files from controller flash memory.
82350-
3-45
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.16.1 File/Directory Operations
 Perform the following steps to access, display, and delete files and directories on the USB drive.
 Connect the USB drive to the USB port on the back panel of the TMC470 Controller.
Note: A compatible USB drive must be connected in order to display and access the USB Backup features. Otherwise,
the system will display an error message indicating the “Device is Not Mounted”. Most thumb drives contain
an LED indicating when the drive is mounted. When an error message is displayed indicating the ”Device is not
mounted” , leave the USB drive inserted and recycle the power on the controller while monitoring this LED light.
If it turns on (The LED will turn on only after the main screen is painted) then proceed to the F4 –Marker, F4USB backup, once again to access the Backup screen.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
 From the Designer or Supervisor Main Screen,
F2:PIN
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
002:[TEXT:
Fixed
Text: ABCDE
F4:USB
BACKUP
003:[
004:[
005:[
press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
 Press F4 (USB BACKUP) to access the Backup Screen.
The Backup screen can display either the directories and
files on the USB drive or files in controller flash memory.
Notice the indicator on the bottom line of the display
(adjacent to F7). When USB is displayed, the screen
shows directories and files on the USB drive. When
FLASH is displayed, the screen shows files in controller
flash memory.
Also notice that the screen displays only one type of file
at a time. Another indicator on the bottom line of the
display (adjacent to F6) shows which type of file is
displayed, where:
PAT = Telesis Pattern Files
TFF = Telesis Font Files
DAT = Telesis Parameter Files
BLK = Telesis Block Files
TSX = Telesis System Hex Files
To access directories and files on the USB drive:
 Press F7 until USB is displayed.
Access Files in Controller
To access files in controller flash memory:
 Press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
3-46
BACKUP (3714564) Total:004 Page:01 of 01
[..
]:DIR
[PATTERNS
]:DIR
[BLOCKS
]:DIR
[PARAMETERS
]:DIR
[TSX
]:DIR
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-< USB >
F8-SIZE
Directories/Files on USB Drive
BACKUP (0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
[PATTERN1.PAT
]:09/30/08;08:16:05
[PATTERN2.PAT
]:09/29/08;08:41:12
[PATTERN3.PAT
]:10/03/08;14:07:33
[PATTERN4.PAT
]:10/06/08;10:15:26
[PATTERN5.PAT
]:10/03/08;16:32:17
F1F2F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-<FLASH>
F8-DATE
Files in Controller Flash Memory
Access Files on USB Drive
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Choose Files to be Displayed
The system will display only one type of file at a time.
 Press F6 until the preferred file type is displayed.
Choose: PAT, BLK, TFF, DAT, or TSX.
Change Directory on USB Drive
Perform these steps to move down the directory structure.
 Press F7 until USB is displayed.
 Press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP as needed to locate the directory.
 If F3-SINGLE (single file mode) is displayed, press TAB to select the directory, then press ENTER (or F1-CHDIR).
 If F3-BATCH (batch file mode) is displayed, press TAB until the cursor is on the directory name (not on the checkbox),
then press ENTER.
 Repeat as required to descend the directory tree.
Perform these steps to move up the directory structure.
 Press F7 until USB is displayed.
 If F3-SINGLE (single file mode) is displayed, press TAB to select the [.. ] directory, then press ENTER (or F1-CHDIR).
 If F3-BATCH (batch file mode) is displayed, TAB until the cursor is on the [.. ] directory name (not on the checkbox),
then press ENTER.
 Repeat as required to ascend the directory tree.
Display File Size
 Display the files you wish to view.
 For files on the USB drive, open the appropriate directory. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
 For files in controller flash memory, press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
 Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
 Press F8 (SIZE) to display the file size information.
Display File Timestamp
 Display the files you wish to view.
 For files on the USB drive, open the appropriate directory. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
 For files in controller flash memory, press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
 Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
 Press F8 (DATE) to display the file timestamp information.
Create a Directory on USB Drive
Note: There is no directory structure in controller flash memory. This procedure applies only to the USB drive.
 Open the directory under which the new directory will reside. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
 Press F2 (MKDIR).
 At the prompt, type the name of the new directory.
 Press F1 (ACCEPT) to create the directory on the USB drive.
82350-
3-47
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
USB File/Directory Operations (continued)
Delete a Single File
 Display the file you wish to delete.
 For files on the USB drive, open the appropriate directory. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
 For files in controller flash memory, press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
 Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
Note: You cannot delete parameter (DAT) files from controller flash memory.
 Press F3 until SINGLE is displayed.
 Press TAB to select the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the file.
 Press F4 (DEL) to delete the file
 At the prompt, verify your intention to delete the file.
 Press F1 (YES) to delete the file.
 Press F2 (NO) to cancel the deletion.
Delete Multiple Files
 Display the file you wish to delete.
 For files on the USB drive, open the appropriate directory. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
 For files in controller flash memory, press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
 Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as applicable.
Note: You cannot delete parameter (DAT) files from controller flash memory.
 Press F3 until BATCH is displayed.
 Select the files to be deleted.
 To select all files, press F1 (SELECT ALL).
 To select specific files:



Press TAB to move the cursor to the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the file.
Press ENTER to select it . (If you need to de-select it , press ENTER again.)
Repeat until all desired files are selected
 Press F4 (DEL) to delete the selected files
 At the prompt, verify your intention to delete the files.
 Press F1 (YES) to delete the files.
 Press F2 (NO) to cancel the deletion.
Delete a Directory on USB Drive
Note: There is no directory structure in controller flash memory. This procedure applies only to the USB drive.
 Select the directory you wish to delete. See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
 Press F4 (DEL) to delete the selected directory from the USB drive
 At the prompt, verify your intention to delete the directory.
 Press F1 (YES) delete the directory.
 Press F2 (NO) to cancel the deletion.
3-48
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.16.2 Backup Files
 Perform the following to steps to backup files from the controller flash memory to a USB drive.
Backup a Single File
 Connect the USB drive to the USB port on the back panel of the TMC470 Controller.
Note: A compatible USB drive must be connected in order to display and access the USB Backup features.
Otherwise, the system will display an error message indicating the “Device is Not Mounted”.

F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
From the Designer or Supervisor Main Screen,
press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
F2:PIN
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
002:[TEXT:
Fixed
Text: ABCDE
F4:USB
BACKUP
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press F4 (USB BACKUP) to access the Backup Screen.
 Press F7 until USB is displayed.
]
]
]
]
]
BACKUP (3714564) Total:004 Page:01 of 01
[..
]:DIR
[PATTERNS
]:DIR
[BLOCKS
]:DIR
[PARAMETERS
]:DIR
[TSX
]:DIR
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-< USB >
F8-SIZE
 Open the target directory on the USB drive where you
wish to save the copied file.
See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
Directories/Files on USB Drive
 Press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
 Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as
applicable.
 Press F3 until SINGLE is displayed.
 Press TAB to select the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the
file.
 Press F5 (COPY) to backup the file from controller flash
memory to the USB drive.
BACKUP (0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
[PATTERN1.PAT
]:09/30/08;08:16:05
[PATTERN2.PAT
]:09/29/08;08:41:12
[PATTERN3.PAT
]:10/03/08;14:07:33
[PATTERN4.PAT
]:10/06/08;10:15:26
[PATTERN5.PAT
]:10/03/08;16:32:17
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-<FLASH>
F8-DATE
Files in Controller Flash Memory
 If the file already exists in the target directory, the
system will prompt you before overwriting the file.
 Press F1 (YES) to overwrite the file.
 Press F2 (NO) to cancel the backup.
82350-
3-49
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Backup Multiple Files
 Connect the USB drive to the USB port on the back panel of the TMC470 Controller.
Note: A compatible USB drive must be connected in order to display and access the USB Backup features.
Otherwise, the system will display an error message indicating the “Device is Not Mounted”.

F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
From the Designer or Supervisor Main Screen,
press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
F2:PIN
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
002:[TEXT:
Fixed
Text: ABCDE
F4:USB
BACKUP
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press F4 (USB BACKUP) to access the Backup Screen.
]
]
]
]
]
BACKUP (3714564) Total:004 Page:01 of 01
[..
]:DIR
[PATTERNS
]:DIR
[BLOCKS
]:DIR
[PARAMETERS
]:DIR
[TSX
]:DIR
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<Single> F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-< USB >
F8-SIZE
 Press F7 until USB is displayed.
 Open the target directory on the USB drive where you
wish to save the copied files.
See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
Directories/Files on USB Drive
 Press F7 until FLASH is displayed.
BACKUP (0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
 [PATTERN1.PAT
]:09/30/08;08:16:05
 [PATTERN2.PAT
]:09/29/08;08:41:12
 [PATTERN3.PAT
]:10/03/08;14:07:33
 [PATTERN4.PAT
]:10/06/08;10:15:26
 [PATTERN5.PAT
]:10/03/08;16:32:17
F1-Select All
F3-<BATCH > F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-<FLASH>
F8-DATE
 Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as
applicable.
 Press F3 until BATCH is displayed
 Select the files to be copied.
 To select all files, press F1 (SELECT ALL).
 To select specific files:



Files in Controller Flash Memory
Press TAB to move the cursor to the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to
locate the file.
Press ENTER to select it . (If you need to de-select it , press ENTER again.)
Repeat until all desired files are selected.
 Press F5 (COPY) to backup the selected files from controller flash memory to the USB drive.
 If a file already exists in the target directory, the system will prompt you before overwriting the file.
 Press F1 (YES) to overwrite the file.
 Press F2 (NO) to cancel the backup of the file in question.
3-50
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.16.3 Restore Files
 Perform the following to steps to restore files from a USB drive to controller flash memory.
Restore a Single File
 Connect the USB drive to the USB port on the back panel of the TMC470 Controller.
Note: A compatible USB drive must be connected in order to display and access the USB Backup features.
Otherwise, the system will display an error message indicating the “Device is Not Mounted”.

F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
From the Designer or Supervisor Main Screen,
press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
F2:PIN
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
002:[TEXT:
Fixed
Text: ABCDE
F4:USB
BACKUP
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press F4 (USB BACKUP) to access the Backup Screen.
]
]
]
]
]
BACKUP (3714564) Total:004 Page:01 of 01
[..
]:DIR
[PATTERNS
]:DIR
[BLOCKS
]:DIR
[PARAMETERS
]:DIR
[TSX
]:DIR
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-< USB >
F8-SIZE
 Press F7 until USB is displayed.
 Open the directory on the USB drive where the file to
be restored is saved.
See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
Directories on USB Drive
 Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as
applicable.
 Press F3 until SINGLE is displayed.
 Press TAB to select the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to locate the
file.
 Press F5 (COPY) to restore the file from the USB drive to
controller flash memory
 If the file already exists in controller flash memory, the
BACKUP (0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
[PATTERN1.PAT
]:09/30/08;08:16:05
[PATTERN2.PAT
]:09/29/08;08:41:12
[PATTERN3.PAT
]:10/03/08;14:07:33
[PATTERN4.PAT
]:10/06/08;10:15:26
[PATTERN5.PAT
]:10/03/08;16:32:17
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-<FLASH>
F8-DATE
Files on USB Drive
system will prompt you before overwriting the file.
 Press F1 (YES) to overwrite the file.
 Press F2 (NO) to cancel restoration.
82350-
3-51
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Restore Multiple Files
 Connect the USB drive to the USB port on the back panel of the TMC470 Controller.
Note: A compatible USB drive must be connected in order to display and access the USB Backup features.
Otherwise, the system will display an error message indicating the “Device is Not Mounted”.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
F2:PIN
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
002:[TEXT:
Fixed
Text: ABCDE
F4:USB
BACKUP
003:[
004:[
005:[
The system will display the Marker Menu.
 Press F4 (USB BACKUP) to access the Backup Screen.
BACKUP (3714564) Total:004 Page:01 of 01
[..
]:DIR
[PATTERNS
]:DIR
[BLOCKS
]:DIR
[PARAMETERS
]:DIR
[TSX
]:DIR
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-< USB >
F8-SIZE
 Press F7 until USB is displayed.
 Open the directory on the USB drive where the files to
be restored are saved.
See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
Directories on USB Drive
 Press F6 until PAT, BLK, TFF, or DAT is displayed, as
applicable.
 Press F3 until BATCH is displayed.
 Select the files to be copied.
 To select all files in the directory, press F1 (SELECT
ALL).
 To select specific files in the directory:



Press TAB to move the cursor to the file.
If necessary, press PAGE DOWN or PAGE UP to
locate the file.
Press ENTER to select it . (If you need to
de-select it , press ENTER again.)
Repeat until all desired files are selected.
BACKUP (0053248) Total:012 Page:01 of 03
 [PATTERN1.PAT
]:09/30/08;08:16:05
 [PATTERN2.PAT
]:09/29/08;08:41:12
 [PATTERN3.PAT
]:10/03/08;14:07:33
 [PATTERN4.PAT
]:10/06/08;10:15:26
 [PATTERN5.PAT
]:10/03/08;16:32:17
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<BATCH > F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<PAT> F7-<FLASH>
F8-DATE
Files on USB Drive
 Press F5 (COPY) to restore the selected files from the USB drive to controller flash memory.
 If a file already exists in controller flash memory, the system will prompt you before overwriting the file.
 Press F1 (YES) to overwrite the file.
 Press F2 (NO) to cancel restoration of the file in question.
3-52
82350-
]
]
]
]
]
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.16.4 Upgrade Controller Firmware
The TMC470 Controller uses a Telesis System Hex (TSX) file to provide the user interface for the marking system. The
controller firmware determines the screens, parameters, and system messages displayed to the operator. It also provides
the appropriate motor drivers for the marking system hardware.
The controller may be upgraded to install a more current version of the same firmware, or to completely change the system
configuration of the controller (e.g., from a SC3500 system to a SC5000 system).
Perform the following to upgrade the controller firmware via the USB port.
 Connect the USB drive to the USB port on the back panel of the TMC470 Controller.
Note: A compatible USB drive must be connected in order to display and access the USB features.
Otherwise, the system will display an error message indicating the “Device is Not Mounted”.

F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
From the Designer or Supervisor Main Screen,
press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
F2:PIN
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
002:[TEXT:
Fixed
Text: ABCDE
F4:USB BACKUP
003:[
004:[
005:[
 Press F4 (USB BACKUP) to access the Backup Screen.
 Press F3 until Single is displayed.
 Press F7 until USB is displayed.
 Press F6 until TSX is displayed.
 Open the directory on the USB drive where the TSX file
is saved.
See Change Directory on USB Drive for details.
]
]
]
]
]
BACKUP (3714564) Total:004 Page:01 of 01
[..
]:DIR
[PATTERNS
]:DIR
[BLOCKS
]:DIR
[PARAMETERS
]:DIR
[TSX
]:DIR
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<TSX> F7-< USB >
F8-SIZE
Directories on USB Drive
BACKUP (3714564) Total:004 Page:01 of 01
[..
]:DIR
[63723.TSX
]:12/29/09 11:06
[63724.TSX
]:12/30/09 13:45
[68852.TSX
]:01/08/10 11:04
[69510.TSX
]:12/30/09 15:45
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<TSX> F7-< USB >
F8-SIZE
 Position the cursor over the desired TSX file.
 Press F5 (COPY).
TSX Files on USB Drive
BACKUP (3714564) Total:004 Page:01 of 01
[..
]:DIR
If changing print head type you must
[63723.TSX
]:12/29/09 11:06
clear parameters and it is strongly
[63724.TSX
]:12/30/09 13:45
recommended to clear patterns
[68852.TSX
]:01/08/10 11:04
[69510.TSX
]:12/30/09 15:45
F1-ACCEPT
F1-ChDir F2-MkDir F3-<Single>
F4-Del
F5-Copy
F6-<TSX> F7-< USB >
F8-SIZE
The system will display the following message.
 Press F1 (ACCEPT) to continue.
82350-
3-53
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Upgrade Controller Firmware (continued)
The system will display the Upgrade System screen.
This screen allows you to delete the existing parameter files in controller flash memory prior to upgrading the system.
Doing so will allow the upgraded firmware to start with the default parameter values. Additionally, you may choose to
delete the existing patterns stored on the controller.
 Select the appropriate actions.
 Press TAB to move the cursor to the desired
selection.
Upgrade System
 Press ENTER to select the action [x].
Press ENTER again to de-select the action [x] .
NOTICE:
If you are changing from one marking head to another
(e.g., from SC3500 to SC5000) you must clear the
parameters. Otherwise, the marking head may
perform erratically
[x] Clear parameters
[x] Clear patterns
Erase Flash :
F1-Update
0%
F2-Cancel
If you are changing from one marking head to another,
Telesis highly recommends that you also clear
the patterns before updating the firmware.
 Do one of the following:
 Press F1 (Update) to perform the selected actions.
or

Press F2 (Cancel) to return the USB Backup Screen.
The system will display the following message to confirm
your intention to upgrade the firmware.
NOTICE: Once the upgrade begins, it cannot be stopped.
If power is interrupted during the upgrade, you must use
the TMC470 Controller Upgrade Utility to download the
TSX file and restore controller firmware integrity.
 Do one of the following:
Upgrade System
[x] Clear parameters
[x] Clear
patterns
Upgrade
program?
Erase
Flash F:2-No0%
F1-Yes
F1-Update
F2-Cancel
 Press F1 (Yes) to proceed with parameter deletion
and pattern deletion (as selected above) and system
upgrade.
or
 Press F2 (No) to cancel the procedure.
Upgrade System
The system will update the display to show the progress of
as the flash memory is cleared. (e.g., Erase Flash : 52%).
After the flash memory is erased, the system will begin
to install the upgrade firmware. Again, The system will
update the display to show the reprogramming progress
(e.g., Update System : 21%).
[x] Clear parameters
[x] Clear patterns
Erase Flash :
F1-Update
52%
F2-Cancel
Upgrade System
When the entire upgrade is complete, the system will
display the message: Upgrade is done. Recycle power.
 On the back panel of the Controller, position the toggle
switch to OFF, wait a few seconds, then position to ON.
Upon startup, the controller will use the upgraded
firmware.
3-54
[x] Clear parameters
[x] Clear
patterns
Upgrade
is done.
Recycle power.
Erase Flash :
F1-Update
82350-
52%
F2-Cancel
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.17 MAINTENANCE TASKS
The following sections describe tests that check the operational performance of the marking system.
3.17.1 Test Output Signals
The Output tests allow you to check the transmission of output signals sent from the controller. Using the software, you can
set the signal states on or off, then verify the proper voltage at the appropriate connector pin to verify operation.
The output signals are transmitted through the I/O Port connector on the TMC470 back panel. Refer to the TMC470
Installation & Maintenance Manual for pin assignments and signal specifications.
WARNING
These procedures may require testing electrical circuits while power is applied
to the marking system. To avoid personal injury, only experienced maintenance
personnel should perform these tests. Regardless of experience, caution should
always be used when working with energized electrical circuits.
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
The system will display the Marker Menu.
 Press F3 MAINTENANCE to view the Maint menu.
F2:PIN
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
002:[TEXT:
Fixed
Text: ABCDE
F4:USB
Backup
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
F1:FILE FMARKER-Maint
2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
 Press F2 IO to access the IO Screen.
The Output signals are displayed on the first page.
 Verify the proper voltage is present at the appropriate
F2:PIN
F7F
:<ENABLED
>
F1:JOG
5:LANG
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F2:IO
F3:MAINT
F8F
:<IO
>
6:SCOPE
002:[TEXT:
Fixed Text:
ABCDE
F3:PULSE
F7:VIEW
003:[ F :TEST
4
004:[
005:[
 Repeat the process to test the other output signals.
IO:
 Press TAB to select the desired output signal.
 Press ENTER to toggle the signal state ON or OFF.
]
]
]
]
]
connector pin.
Refer to the TMC470 Installation & Maintenance
Manual for pin assignments and signal specifications.
OUTPUTS
INPUTS
Ready
: < OFF>
Done
: < ON >
Paused
: < OFF>
No Fault : < ON >
 When finished, press ESC to exit the test screen.
Spare 1 :
Spare 2 :
< OFF>
< OFF>
ESC Exit
82350-
3-55
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.17.2 Test Input Signals
The Input tests allow you to check the transmission of input signals received by the controller. You can activate the signals
from an external source by applying the proper voltage to the appropriate connector pins. The software will display the
signal states as on or off to verify proper operation.
Most input signals are received through the I/O Port connector on the TMC470 back panel, except as noted below. Refer to
the TMC470 Installation & Maintenance Manual for pin assignments and signal specifications.
WARNING
These procedures may require testing electrical circuits while power is applied
to the marking system. To avoid personal injury, only experienced maintenance
personnel should perform these tests. Regardless of experience, caution should
always be used when working with energized electrical circuits.
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
The system will display the Marker Menu.
 Press F3 MAINT to view the Maintenance menu.
F2:PIN
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
F3:MAINT
002:[TEXT:
Fixed
Text: ABCDE
F4:USB
Backup
003:[
004:[
005:[
]
]
]
]
]
 Press F2 IO to access the IO Screen.
The Output signals are displayed on the first page.
F1:FILEMARKER-Maint
F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
F1:JOG
:LANG
F2:PIN
FF75:<ENABLED
>
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
]
F2:IO
:SCOPE >
F3:MAINT
FF86:<IO
002:[TEXT:
Fixed Text:
ABCDE
]
F3:PULSE
F7:VIEW
003:[ F4:TEST
]
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press PAGE DOWN to display the Inputs page.
This page shows the various input signals that can be
received by the controller.
Refer to the TMC470 Installation & Maintenance
Manual for pin assignments and signal specifications.
Note the following:






3-56
The Go and Abort signals may be received
through the I/O Port or the TTL Port.
The Online signal name is SEL_6. It may be
configured to remotely place the machine online or
to remotely select patterns for loading. Refer to
Startup (IO) Properties for details.
IO:
OUTPUTS
INPUTS
Select 0,1,2,3,4,5:      
Go
:

Home 1,2,3,4:    
Abort :

Spare 1,2,3:
  
Online:

Over Temp :

X Error: 
Y Error
:

ESC Exit
The Home 1 and Home 2 signals are received
through the Marker Port.
The Home 3 and Home 4 signals are reserved
for custom applications.
The Over Temp signal is an internal signal issued by the TMC470 CPU.
It cannot be tested externally and serves only as a status indicator.
SS3700 Markers only: The X Error and Y Error inputs indicate a software driver error for the axes motors.
These signals are received through the marker cable. To test, disconnect the marker cable from the controller,
then, at the controller Marker port, connect the appropriate pin to ground to simulate the input signal. Refer to
the SS3700 Installation & Maintenance Manual for marker cable pin out information;
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
CAUTION
If the Over Temp signal is ON (), it indicates the controller temperature has
exceeded 65°C (149°F). This is a very serious condition. The software will not
allow any machine movement. If the Over Temp signal is ON, shut down the
controller immediately and contact Telesis Customer Support.
 Activate the input signal to be tested.
 Verify the proper signal state is displayed.
 indicates the signal is ON.
 indicates the signal is OFF.
 Repeat the process to test the other input signals.
 When finished, press ESC to exit the test screen.
82350-
3-57
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.17.3 Test Solenoids
The solenoid tests allow you activate the solenoids to verify they are operating properly.
The solenoid signals are transmitted through the Marker Port connector on the TMC470 back panel. Refer to the TMC470
Installation & Maintenance Manual for pin assignments and signal specifications.
WARNING
These procedures may require testing electrical circuits while power is applied
to the marking system. To avoid personal injury, only experienced maintenance
personnel should perform these tests. Regardless of experience, caution should
always be used when working with energized electrical circuits.
NOTICE
Standard TeleScribe markers use only one solenoid (#1).
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
F1:FILE MARKER-Maint
F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
F1:JOG
5:LANG
F2:PIN
F7F:<ENABLED
>
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
]
F2:IO
6:SCOPE
F3:MAINT
F8F:<PULSE>
002:[TEXT:
Fixed Text:
ABCDE
]
F3:PULSE
F7:VIEW
003:[ F4:TEST
]
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Press F3 MAINT to view Maintenance menu.
 Press F3 PULSE to access the Pulse screen.
 Press TAB to select the desired solenoid (1 through 8).
 Press ENTER to select (or de-select) the solenoid.
 indicates the solenoid is selected.
 indicates the solenoid is not selected.
PULSE
 Repeat the process to select (or de-select) other
Pins 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8:        
solenoids, as applicable.
Pin State: Idle
 Press F1 (EXTEND) to activate the selected solenoid(s).
The system will energize the solenoid(s) and extend the
pin. The Pin State will flash “Extended” while the test is
run.
 Confirm the solenoids operate as expected.
 Press F2 (RETRACT)to end the test.
The system will de-energize the selected solenoid(s) and retract the pin.
The Pin State will display “Idle”.
 When finished, press ESC to exit the test screen.
3-58
82350-
F1 PULSE
F2 STOP
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.17.4 Test Machine Movement
These tests allow you to check the marker motors and the machine range of travel.
WARNING
Stay clear of the marking system when jogging the machine to avoid contact
with the moving equipment.
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
 Press F3 MAINT to view Maintenance menu.
 Press F1 JOG to access the JOG menu.
The first page automatically displays the Jog X/Y Screen. This
screen allows you to reposition the X/Y (lateral) axes.
F1:FILE MARKER-Maint
F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
F3:JOG
5:LANG
F2:PIN
F7F:<ENABLED
>
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
]
F2:IO
6:SCOPE
F3:MAINT
F8F:<PULSE>
002:[TEXT:
ABCDE
]
PULSEFixed Text:
F7:VIEW
003:[ F4:TEST
]
004:[
]
005:[
]
 Select the size of movement.
JOG:
 Verify the cursor is on the Resolution parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
X/Y
Resolution: <COARSE >
X: [ 0.0000]in
Y: [ 4.0000]in
 The Resolution parameter allows you to choose
the size of each Jog movement.
 Press ENTER to toggle through the available
Resolution selections: Single, Fine, or Coarse.
F1 ACCEPT
F2 GOTO
 Jog the X- and Y-axes.
Values displayed in the X and Y boxes show the
current marker position in the marking window. As
the machine moves, the system will update
coordinates.
JOG:
X/Y
Resolution: <COARSE >
X: [ 0.0000]in
Y: [ 4.0000]in
 Press the LEFT or RIGHT ARROW key to move the
machine left or right along the X-axis.
 Press the UP or DOWN ARROW key to move the
F1 ACCEPT
machine back and forth along the Y-axis.
F2 GOTO
 Move to a specific X/Y location.
 Press TAB to select the X-axis box.
 Enter the X-axis coordinate where you wish to move the marker.
 Press TAB to select the Y-axis box.
 Enter the Y-axis coordinate where you wish to move the marker.
 Press F2 (GOTO) to move the marker to the specified X/Y coordinate location.
 When finished, press ESC to exit the test screen.
82350-
3-59
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.17.5 Verify Marker Position
The Exercise test moves the marker through its range of motion, allowing the system to verify when the position flags clear
and engage the X-axis and Y-axis opto sensors.
When activated, the system will:
1.
Home the marker.
2.
Verify both opto sensors are engaged.
3.
Move the pin to its limits around the boundaries of the marking window.
4.
Verify the opto sensors are properly cleared and engaged as the marker moves.
5.
Move the pin Home.
6.
Verify both opto sensors are engaged.
7.
Move the pin diagonally to its limits.
8.
Verify both opto sensors are cleared.
9.
Move the pin Home and stop.
10. Verify both opto sensors are engaged.
Upon completion of the test, the system will display the test results as PASSED of FAILED.
WARNING
When the Exercise Test is performed, the marking system equipment will
automatically move around the entire perimeter of the marking window. Stay
clear of the marking system when running the Exercise Test to avoid contact
with the moving equipment.
CAUTION
Certain tests on the Maintenance/Test screen are provided to check the
operation of the circuit boards installed in the TMC470 Controller (MAIN, IO,
AUX AXIS, and BURN-IN). These tests require special test equipment.
Accordingly, these tests are intended for use by Telesis-authorized technicians
only. Telesis strongly recommends that you do not run these tests without the
appropriate test equipment or without the consent of Telesis Technologies, Inc.
Contact Telesis Customer Support for more information.
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F
1:ABOUT
MARKER-Maint
F2:PIN
F7:<ENABLED >
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
]
3:MAINT F8:<TEST
>
FF1:JOG
F5:LANG
002:[TEXT:
Fixed Text:
ABCDE
]
F6:SCOPE
003:[ F2:IO
]
F
:PULSE
F
:VIEW
3
7
004:[
]
005:[ F4:TEST
]
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4 (MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
 Press F3 MAINT for Maintenance ,emu.
 Press F4 TEST to access the Test menu.
TEST: 
Exercise
Press the <
3-60
82350-
Start
> Button
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Verify Marker Position (continued)
TEST: 
 Press PAGE DOWN until the Exercise Screen is
Exercise
displayed.
Press the <
Start
> Button
 To begin the tests, press the Start (Print) key:
TEST: 
As the test progresses, the system will update the display
similar to the screen shown here.


The first line shows the target location (X/Y
coordinates) where the marker is going.
Move to 6.0, 4.0
Current location: 6.0, 4.0
The second line shows the current location (X/Y
coordinates) where the marker actually is.
When the tests complete, the results of the exercise are
displayed on the bottom line.


Exercise
TEST: 
PASSED indicates the system was able to confirm
the X-axis and Y-axis opto sensors were cleared and
engaged as expected.
Exercise
Move to 0.0, 4.0
Current location: 0.0, 4.0
FAILED indicates the system was unable to verify
the opto sensors were properly cleared and
engaged.
For assistance, contact Telesis Customer Support.
Exercise PASSED
 To re-run the tests, press the Start (Print) key:
 To exit the Test Screen and return to the Main Screen, press ESC.
82350-
3-61
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3.17.6 Monitor Communications
The Datascope feature is a tool that can be used to monitor and debug communications over the TMC470 controller Serial1,
Serial2, or Ethernet port. When enabled, the Datascope feature will log communications to and from the selected port.
To enable the Datascope feature:
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
:002
F1:ABOUTPattern:SAMPLE_02
MARKER-Maint
F2:PIN
F7:<ENABLED >
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
]
F3:MAINT
F8:<SCOPE>
F1:JOG
F5:LANG
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F2:IO
F6:<SCOPE
003:[
]
F3:PULSE
F7:VIEW
004:[
]
F4:TEST
005:[
]
(MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
 Press F3 MAINT to the MAINTENANCE menu.
 Press F6 SCOPE to access the DATASCOPE Screen.
 Verify the cursor is on the Enabled parameter.
If not, press TAB to select it.
DATASCOPE
 Press ENTER to toggle the setting ON or OFF.


indicates the feature is disabled.
indicates the feature is enabled.
ENABLE 
CLEAR 
PORT
PROTOCOL 
< SERIAL1>
F1 SAVE
F2 EXIT
 Press TAB to select it the Port parameter.
The Port parameter allows you to choose which port
to monitor. Note that only the selected port will
be monitored.
DATASCOPE
 Press ENTER to toggle the selection to Serial1,
Serial2, or Ethernet (as applicable).
ENABLE 
CLEAR 
PORT
PROTOCOL 
< SERIAL1>
F1 SAVE
F2 EXIT
 Press TAB to select it the Clear parameter.
The Clear parameter allows you to remove the
logged entries from the Datascope queue.
 indicates the logged entries will be retained.

indicates the logged entries will be deleted.
DATASCOPE
ENABLE 
CLEAR 
PORT
PROTOCOL 
< SERIAL1>
F1 SAVE
3-62
82350-
F2 EXIT
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Press TAB to select it the Protocol parameter.
The Protocol parameter allows you to limit the
Datascope so that only protocol-defined characters
will be logged.
 indicates all characters that are communicated
will be logged.

indicates only protocol-defined characters will
be logged.
DATASCOPE
ENABLE 
CLEAR 
PORT
PROTOCOL 
< SERIAL1>
F1 SAVE
F2 EXIT
 Do one of the following:
 Press F1 to save the parameter settings.
If the Clear parameter is enabled, the system
will close the Datascope screen and delete
the logged entries from the Datascope
queue.
DATASCOPE
or
 Press F2 to exit the Datascope screen without
ENABLE 
CLEAR 
PORT
PROTOCOL 
< SERIAL1>
F1 SAVE
saving the parameter settings.
The system will retain the logged entries in
the Datascope queue, even if the Clear
parameter is enabled.
F2 EXIT
NOTICE
When you display the View screen, the system will disable Datascope feature.
After viewing the log entries, you must re-enable the Datascope feature in
order to continue monitoring the selected port.
To view the Datascope queue:
 From the Supervisor Main Screen, press F4
F1:FILE F2:EDIT F3:MACHINE F4:MARKER F5:SETUP
SUPV –Offline–
Pattern:SAMPLE_02
:002
F
1:ABOUT
MARKER-Maint
F2:PIN
F7:<ENABLED >
*001:[TEXT:
User Text:
]
3:MAINT F8:<SCOPE>
FF1:JOG
F5:LANG
002:[TEXT: Fixed Text: ABCDE
]
F2:IO
F6:SCOPE
003:[
]
F3:PULSE
F7:VIEW
004:[
]
F4:TEST
005:[
]
(MARKER).
The system will display the Marker Menu.
 Press F3 MAINT to view the MAINTENANCE menu.
 Press F7 VIEW to access the View Screen.
 The View Screen displays 6 entries at a time.
The Datascope queue stores up to 120 entries. The
View Screen displays 6 entries at a time, Press the
PAGE UP or PAGE DOWN key to view additional
entries as applicable.
Each entry begins with a timestamp and shows a
single communication transmission to (RX) or from
(TX) the selected port on the controller.
VIEW
ESC Exit
[11:19:12 RX:<SOH>S<STX><ETX><CR>
[11:19:15 TX:<SOH>S<STX>0000<ETX>019<CR>
[
[
[
[
If the text received by the controller contains more
than 44 characters, then the text will be displayed on
multiple lines in the View Screen.
If the Datascope queue has been cleared and no other
entries have been logged, then no text will be displayed on the screen.
 Press ESC to close the View Screen.
 REMEMBER! Re-enable the Datascope feature if you wish to continue monitoring communications.
82350-
3-63
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
3-64
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Chapter 4
System Messages
The following pages provide an alphabetized list of the various messages that may be displayed during system operation.
Refer to this list for an explanation of the messages and to help clarify or resolve the situation.
Delete Parameter(s) Is Not Allowed
You have attempted to delete a parameter file from controller flash memory. To protect the integrity of the marking
system software, the parameter files stored on the controller cannot be deleted. You may restore parameter files using the
USB Backup/Restore features or you may reset the system parameters to their factory-default settings.
Denied On an Empty Pattern!
This message is displayed if you attempt to Pre-Position the machine with a pattern that contains no objects. The PrePosition command moves the machine to the location of the first printable field of the pattern. Since the pattern
contains no objects, execution of the Pre-Position command is denied.
Denied! Marker Is Offline!
Certain features require the machine to be online before they can be executed. Place the machine online and try again.
Device Is Not Formatted
The device connected to the controller USB port is either not properly formatted or is not compatible for use with the
TMC470 controller marking system.
Device Is Not Mounted
You have attempted to access the USB Backup features before connecting a USB device to the controller.
Connect a suitable USB device to the controller USB port and try again.
Error: 7 Bits / No Parity Is Not Supported!
This message is displayed if you attempt to configure the Host Communication parameters with incompatible settings.
If you set the Bits parameter to 7, you must set the Parity parameter to either Odd or Even. You cannot use a 7-bit /
No Parity configuration.
Error: Alpha SN Range Warning! (A-Z)
This error is displayed if you attempt to save the Omni serial number Alpha parameter with an invalid value. The Alpha
parameter value must be an uppercase, alphabetic character (A through Z).
Error: An Edit Field Needs Selected
You have attempted to edit a field that cannot be edited. Move the cursor to a valid field and try again.
Error: Cannot Copy an Empty Field
This message is displayed if you select the Edit/Copy command while the cursor is positioned on an empty line in the
pattern object list. Move the cursor to line that contains a valid field and try again.
Error: Cannot Cut an Empty Field
This message is displayed if you select the Edit/Cut command while the cursor is positioned on an empty line in the
pattern object list. Move the cursor to line that contains a valid field and try again.
82350-
4-1
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Error: Cannot Save, Flash Disk Is Full
This message is displayed if you attempt to save a pattern to the controller and there is insufficient space remaining in
flash memory. If necessary, backup your pattern files to a USB device, then delete any obsolete or unused patterns
from the controller to free up space.
Error: ChDir Failed
The marking system software is unable to open the specified directory on the device connected to the UBS port.
Error: Copy Failed
The marking system software is unable to copy the selected file(s) to the target location.
Error: Copying Unknown Parameter File
This message is displayed if you attempt to copy an unknown parameter file from the USB device to controller flash
memory. To protect the integrity of the marking system software, only valid parameter files may be copied to the
controller. Note that if you attempt a batch copy, the system will not display this message. Instead, it will copy the
valid parameter files in the batch and ignore all unknown, invalid files.
Error: Delete Failed
The marking system software is unable to delete the selected file(s) from the target location.
Error: in Deleting the Pattern!
This indicates a System Error. The system was unable to delete the specified pattern. Try deleting the pattern again.
If the error continues, contact Telesis Customer Support.
Error: in Loading Pattern!
This indicates a System Error. The system was unable to load the specified pattern. Try loading the pattern again. If
the error continues, contact Telesis Customer Support.
Error: in Saving Pattern!
This message indicates the system was unable to save this pattern into memory. There may be too many patterns
already stored in memory. Try saving the pattern again. If the error continues, contact Telesis Customer Support.
Error: Invalid Source
This error message is displayed if you attempt to copy or delete a single file and no file is selected. The cursor may be
accidentally positioned on a directory name. Ensure the cursor is on the desired file name, then try again.
Error: MkDir Failed
The marking system software is unable to create a new directory on the device connected to the UBS port.
Error: Over Temperature Fault Detected
This message is displayed if the controller temperature has exceeded 65°C (149°F) and you attempt to jog or online
the machine, or attempt to print a pattern. If an over temperature condition occurs, the software will set the Over
Temp signal to ON and will not allow any machine movement. See Test Input Signals (Chapter 3).
If an over temperature condition occurs, shut down the controller and contact Telesis Customer Support.
Error: Paste Buffer Is Empty
This message is displayed if you select the Edit/Paste command with nothing stored in the paste buffer. Cut (or copy) the
source again try pasting again.
4-2
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Error: Serial Number Range Warning!
This message is displayed when the pattern serial number reaches its defined limit and the Halt printing option is
enabled. Reset the pattern serial number or change the printing option from Halt to Wrap.
This message may also be displayed while using the SN Editor. The current serial number (SN parameter value) must
be within the defined serial number range (i.e., between the Lower and Upper Limit parameters). If you attempt to exit
the SN Editor page, or attempt to save the parameter settings with the serial number out of range, the system will
display this error message.
Error: UNTITLED Is a Reserved Name!
You have attempted to save a pattern under the name "UNTITLED". This is the default name given to newly created
patterns and is reserved for system use. Select another name and try again. Note: When you save a new pattern for
the first time, be sure to use the File/Save As command instead of File/Save.
Field (nn) - User Font Error!
If you define a Text or ArcText field to use a custom User font, the User font must reside in controller memory. If not,
the system will issue this message when you test the pattern. See Test Patterns (Chapter 2). If you created a custom
font using the Telesis Logo/Font Generator software, ensure it is downloaded to the controller so it may be used in your
patterns.
F-Ram Error ... Initializing F-Ram
This error is displayed if there is a problem initializing the controller flash RAM.
Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
Home Limit Error in X-axis
This error may indicate a faulty home limit switch in the X-axis. Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
Home Limit Error in Y-axis
This error may indicate a faulty home limit switch in the Y-axis. Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
I2C Error with F-Ram
This error is displayed if there is an I2C communication problem with the controller flash RAM.
Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
I2C Error with RT Clock
This error is displayed if there is an I2C communication problem with the controller real-time clock.
Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
I2C Interface Failed to Initialize!
This error is displayed if the I2C communication interface fails to initialize.
Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
I2C RT Clock Low Battery Warning!
This error is displayed if the controller real-time clock battery voltage is low and needs to be replaced.
Contact Telesis Customer Support for assistance.
Marker Aborted!
This message is displayed after the STOP button on the keyboard is pressed or after receiving an STOP command from
the host computer or from a remote I/O controller. You must acknowledge the Marker Aborted message and place the
machine online to resume normal operations.
82350-
4-3
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Marker Aborted! Over Temperature Fault
This message is displayed if the controller temperature exceeds 65°C (149°F) while a print cycle is in progress. If an
over temperature condition occurs, the software will set the Over Temp signal to ON, abort the current print cycle, and
will not allow any further machine movement. See Test Input Signals (Chapter 3).
If an over temperature condition occurs, shut down the controller and contact Telesis Customer Support.
No Pattern Loaded! Pre-position What?
A pattern must be loaded for the machine to execute a Pre-Position command.
Load a pattern and try again.
Memory Allocation Error
This message may appear if there is insufficient space remaining in controller flash memory to accommodate a batch
file copy. Before executing the batch copy, the system first calculates the space required to copy all files from the
selected directory on the USB drive. If there will not be sufficient space to store all files in controller flash memory, the
system will post this message and disallow batch copying from the selected directory. You may still perform single file
copying from the USB drive/directory (memory permitting), or you could try reducing the number of files in the
selected directory on the USB drive.
Parameter Error! Defaults Loaded!
This message is displayed during power-up if an error is detected with controller memory. The system was unable to
load the user-defined parameters, so the system (factory) default parameters were loaded instead.
Password Error! **Access Denied**
You entered an invalid password while attempting to access the Designer mode or the Supervisor mode. Enter the
correct password and try again. Contact the system supervisor for further assistance.
Pattern Pixel Range Error! Field (nn)
This message is displayed during a pattern test if the system detects any portion of any field is outside of the printable
area of the marking window. See Test Patterns (Chapter 2). Determine which field is out of range, relocate the field as
required, then re-run the pattern test.
Serial Tool is Not Enabled
You have attempted to add a Serial command to a pattern while the Serial Tool feature is disabled.
Enable the Serial Tool and try again. See Serial2 Communication Properties (Chapter 3).
Timeout... Cannot Find Home Position!
The machine attempted to move to Home but was unable to verify the Home position. Place the machine online. If the
error continues, contact Telesis Customer Support.
Variable Text Field Not Found
This error message will be displayed if the Host attempts to download data to a pattern and it is unable to locate a
variable text field. Either the wrong pattern is loaded, no variable text fields exist in the pattern or, if you are using
Extended Protocol, the field number of the variable text field is improperly identified.
4-4
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Appendix A
Standard Telesis Fonts
The following pages illustrate the standard Telesis fonts and their complete character sets.
SIMPLEX Font Character Set
PS-OCR Font Character Set
82350-
A-1
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
COMPLEX Font Character Set
A-2
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
DIN Font Character Set
82350-
A-3
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
This page intentionally left blank.
A-4
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Appendix B
ASCII Character Cross Reference
Standard ASCII Characters
This table may be convenient when devising communications between the controller and a host computer.
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
NULL
0
00
SPACE
32
20
@
64
40
'
96
60
ctrl A SOH
1
01
!
33
21
A
65
41
a
97
61
ctrl B STX
2
02
"
34
22
B
66
42
b
98
62
ctrl C ETX
3
03
#
35
23
C
67
43
c
99
63
ctrl D EOT
4
04
$
36
24
D
68
44
d
100
64
ctrl E ENQ
5
05
%
37
25
E
69
45
e
101
65
ctrl F ACK
6
06
&
38
26
F
70
46
f
102
66
ctrl G BEL
7
07
'
39
27
G
71
47
g
103
67
ctrl H BS
8
08
(
40
28
H
72
48
h
104
68
ctrl I HT
9
09
)
41
29
I
73
49
i
105
69
ctrl J LF
10
0A
*
42
2A
J
74
4A
j
106
6A
ctrl K VT
11
0B
+
43
2B
K
75
4B
k
107
6B
ctrl L FF
12
0C
,
44
2C
L
76
4C
l
108
6C
ctrl M CR
13
0D
-
45
2D
M
77
4D
m
109
6D
ctrl N SO
14
0E
.
46
2E
N
78
4E
n
110
6E
ctrl O SI
15
0F
/
47
2F
O
79
4F
o
111
6F
ctrl P DLE
16
10
0
48
30
P
80
50
p
112
70
ctrl Q DC1
17
11
1
49
31
Q
81
51
q
113
71
ctrl R DC2
18
12
2
50
32
R
82
52
r
114
72
ctrl S DC3
19
13
3
51
33
S
83
53
s
115
73
ctrl T DC4
20
14
4
52
34
T
84
54
t
116
74
ctrl U NAK
21
15
5
53
35
U
85
55
u
117
75
ctrl V SYN
22
16
6
54
36
V
86
56
v
118
76
ctrl W ETB
23
17
7
55
37
W
87
57
w
119
77
ctrl X CAN
24
18
8
56
38
X
88
58
x
120
78
ctrl Y EM
25
19
9
57
39
Y
89
59
y
121
79
ctrl Z SUB
26
1A
:
58
3A
Z
90
5A
z
122
7A
ctrl [ ESC
27
1B
;
59
3B
[
91
5B
{
123
7B
ctrl \ FS
28
1C
<
60
3C
\
92
5C
|
124
7C
ctrl ] GS
29
1D
=
61
3D
]
93
5D
}
125
7D
ctrl ^
RS
30
1E
>
62
3E
^
94
5E
~
126
7E
ctrl _ US
31
1F
?
63
3F
_
95
5F
DEL
127
7F
82350-
B-1
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
EXTENDED ASCII CHARACTERS
Extended ASCII characters may be created using the Telesis Logo/Font Generator software.
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
ASCII
DEC
HEX
€
128
80
none
160
A0
À
192
C0
à
224
E0
none
129
81
¡
161
A1
Á
193
C1
á
225
E1
‚
130
82
¢
162
A2
Â
194
C2
â
226
E2
ƒ
131
83
£
163
A3
Ã
195
C3
ã
227
E3
„
132
84
¤
164
A4
Ä
196
C4
ä
228
E4
…
133
85
¥
165
A5
Å
197
C5
å
229
E5
†
134
86
¦
166
A6
Æ
198
C6
æ
230
E6
‡
135
87
§
167
A7
Ç
199
C7
ç
231
E7
ˆ
136
88
¨
168
A8
È
200
C8
è
232
E8
‰
137
89
©
169
A9
É
201
C9
é
233
E9
Š
138
8A
ª
170
AA
Ê
202
CA
ê
234
EA
‹
139
8B
«
171
AB
Ë
203
CB
ë
235
EB
Œ
140
8C
¬
172
AC
Ì
204
CC
ì
236
EC
none
141
8D
-
173
AD
Í
205
CD
í
237
ED
none
142
8E
®
174
AE
Î
206
CE
î
238
EE
none
143
8F
¯
175
AF
Ï
207
CF
ï
239
EF
none
144
90
°
176
B0
Ð
208
D0
ð
240
F0
‘
145
91
±
177
B1
Ñ
209
D1
ñ
241
F1
’
146
92
²
178
B2
Ò
210
D2
ò
242
F2
“
147
93
³
179
B3
Ó
211
D3
ó
243
F3
”
148
94
´
180
B4
Ô
212
D4
ô
244
F4
•
149
95
µ
181
B5
Õ
213
D5
õ
245
F5
–
150
96
¶
182
B6
Ö
214
D6
ö
246
F6
—
151
97
·
183
B7
×
215
D7
÷
247
F7
˜
152
98
¸
184
B8
0
216
D8
0
248
F8
™
153
99
¹
185
B9
Ù
217
D9
ù
249
F9
š
154
9A
º
186
BA
Ú
218
DA
ú
250
FA
›
155
9B
»
187
BB
Û
219
DB
û
251
FB
œ
156
9C
¼
188
BC
Ü
220
DC
ü
252
FC
none
157
9D
½
189
BD
Ý
221
DD
ý
253
FD
None
158
9E
¾
190
BE
Þ
222
DE
þ
254
FE
Ÿ
159
9F
¿
191
BF
ß
223
DF
ÿ
255
FF
B-2
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Index
A
B
abort print ............................................................................ 1-14
abort select (remote switch) ................................................ 3-15
accessing
designer mode .................................................................... 2-9
supervisor mode ................................................................. 3-2
adding
arcs, 3pt ............................................................................ 2-23
arcs, radius ........................................................................ 2-20
arctext, 3pt ........................................................................ 2-31
arctext, radius ................................................................... 2-25
block objects ..................................................................... 2-55
boxes ................................................................................. 2-42
circles ................................................................................ 2-45
ellipses, 3pt ....................................................................... 2-51
ellipses, radius ................................................................... 2-47
goto commands ................................................................ 2-58
input commands ............................................................... 2-62
lines ................................................................................... 2-37
lines, 2pt............................................................................ 2-40
machine commands .......................................................... 2-70
output commands ............................................................. 2-66
pattern instructions .......................................................... 2-84
pause commands .............................................................. 2-60
serial commands ............................................................... 2-67
text fields .......................................................................... 2-14
adjusting
pattern objects .................................................................. 2-76
speed (diagonal) .......................................................... 2-71, 86
speed (diagonal) .................................................................. 3-5
speed (end) ................................................................. 2-71, 86
speed (end) ......................................................................... 3-5
speed (max.)...................................................................... 2-71
speed (max.)........................................................................ 3-4
speed, marker ................................................................... 2-71
speed, marker ..................................................................... 3-4
alerts/messages ...................................................................... 4-1
allocating file size ................................................................. 3-17
alpha serial number prefix .................................................... 3-13
anchor point ........................................................................... 2-2
arcs
3 pt .................................................................................... 2-23
radius ................................................................................ 2-20
arctext
3 pt .................................................................................... 2-31
radius ................................................................................ 2-25
area of mark ........................................................................... 2-2
ASCII characters ...................................................................... B-1
backup patterns & parameters .............................................3-49
baud rate
serial1 (host) port .............................................................. 3-19
serial2 port.........................................................................3-35
BCC ........................................................................................3-34
beep enable/disable .............................................................. 3-16
bits setting
serial1 (host) port .............................................................. 3-19
serial2 port.........................................................................3-35
block files
library .................................................................................2-88
max size .............................................................................3-18
size allocation ....................................................................3-18
block objects .........................................................................2-55
boundary of mark ....................................................................2-2
boxes .....................................................................................2-42
buffer setup .............................................................................3-7
C
cautions ..................................................................................... xi
changing
field parameters ................................................................ 2-73
mode, designer ....................................................................2-9
mode, supervisor .................................................................3-2
pattern parameters ...........................................................2-73
print order .........................................................................2-75
character
ASCII-decimal-hexadecimal................................................. B-1
checksum .............................................................................2-8
control .................................................................................1-7
cross reference ................................................................... B-1
dimemsions..........................................................................2-4
fonts, considerations ...........................................................2-4
fonts, samples ..................................................................... A-1
ignore ........................................................................... 3-21, 36
start ............................................................................. 3-21, 36
terminator ................................................................... 3-21, 36
check code.............................................................................3-34
checksum flags ........................................................................2-8
circles ....................................................................................2-45
coded data...............................................................................2-6
commands
goto....................................................................................2-58
input ..................................................................................2-62
machine .............................................................................2-70
output ................................................................................2-66
pause .................................................................................2-60
serial ..................................................................................2-67
communication formats .................................................. 3-20, 27
communication monitoring ...................................................3-61
82350-
Index-3
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
complex font .......................................................................... A-2
configuring
default text settings .......................................................... 2-82
file size .............................................................................. 3-17
park position ..................................................................... 2-81
pattern instructions .......................................................... 2-84
pattern serial number ....................................................... 2-78
remote pattern selection .................................................. 2-87
system parameters ............................................................. 3-1
control characters .................................................................. 1-7
controller
firmware upgrade ............................................................. 3-53
keyboard ............................................................................. 1-3
networked .............................................................. 3-20, 27, 28
operation ............................................................................ 1-1
overtemperature .............................................................. 3-56
coordinates ............................................................................. 2-2
copying fields ........................................................................ 2-73
copyng patterns .................................................................... 2-13
copyright ................................................................................. viii
creating
arcs, 3pt ............................................................................ 2-23
arcs, radius ........................................................................ 2-20
arctext, 3pt........................................................................ 2-31
arctext, radius ................................................................... 2-25
block objects ..................................................................... 2-55
boxes ................................................................................. 2-42
circles ................................................................................ 2-45
ellipses, 3pt ....................................................................... 2-51
ellipses, radius................................................................... 2-47
goto commands ................................................................ 2-58
input commands ............................................................... 2-62
lines ................................................................................... 2-37
lines, 2pt ........................................................................... 2-40
machine commands .......................................................... 2-70
new pattern ...................................................................... 2-12
new pattern wizard ........................................................... 2-10
output commands ............................................................. 2-66
pattern instructions .......................................................... 2-84
pause commands .............................................................. 2-60
serial commands ............................................................... 2-67
text fields .......................................................................... 2-14
custom fonts
library ................................................................................ 2-88
customer support ...................................................................... ix
cycle time ............................................................................. 1-16
decimal characters ..................................................................B-1
default parameters, reset ..................................................... 3-44
default text settings .............................................................. 2-82
defining
arcs, 3pt ............................................................................. 2-23
arcs, radius ......................................................................... 2-20
arctext, 3pt ........................................................................ 2-31
arctext, radius .................................................................... 2-25
block objects ...................................................................... 2-55
boxes ................................................................................. 2-42
circles ................................................................................. 2-45
default text ....................................................................... 2-82
ellipses, 3pt ........................................................................ 2-51
ellipses, radius ................................................................... 2-47
file size ............................................................................... 3-17
goto commands ................................................................. 2-58
input commands ................................................................ 2-62
lines ................................................................................... 2-37
lines, 2pt ............................................................................ 2-40
machine commands........................................................... 2-70
output commands ............................................................. 2-66
park position ...................................................................... 2-81
pattern instructions ........................................................... 2-84
pattern serial number ........................................................ 2-78
pause commands ............................................................... 2-60
query text ............................................................................ 3-7
serial commands ................................................................ 2-67
system parameters .............................................................. 3-1
text fields ........................................................................... 2-14
deleting
fields from patterns ........................................................... 2-74
pattern instructions ........................................................... 2-84
pattern, block, font files .................................................... 2-88
design
considerations ..................................................................... 2-1
jog ........................................................................................ 2-3
mode.................................................................................... 2-9
designing
new pattern ....................................................................... 2-12
new pattern wizard............................................................ 2-10
patterns, overview ............................................................... 2-1
diacritic symbols ...................................................................... 1-7
diagonal speed ................................................................ 2-71, 86
diagonal speed ........................................................................ 3-5
dimensioning characters ......................................................... 2-4
DIN font .................................................................................. A-3
disable
keyboard beep ................................................................... 3-16
keyboard/display ............................................................... 3-16
marker ................................................................................. 1-9
pin ...................................................................................... 3-43
display enable/disable........................................................... 3-16
displaying
menus .................................................................................. 1-4
patterns, block, font files ................................................... 2-88
print cycle time .................................................................. 1-16
software version ................................................................ 1-16
D
data
system-supplied .................................................................. 2-6
user-supplied .................................................................... 1-12
datascope ............................................................................. 3-61
date codes
overview ............................................................................. 2-8
usage ................................................................................... 3-8
date insertion ......................................................................... 2-8
debounce parameter ............................................................ 3-17
Index-4
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
downloading
firmware upgrade ............................................................. 3-53
dryrun ................................................................................... 1-14
duplicating fields .................................................................. 2-73
extended protocol
check code .........................................................................3-34
examples ............................................................................3-28
message format .................................................................3-28
message types ...................................................................3-30
overview ............................................................................3-27
response format ................................................................ 3-29
E
echo feature ................................................................... 3-22, 37
edit keys ................................................................................. 1-6
editing
arcs, 3pt ............................................................................ 2-23
arcs, radius ........................................................................ 2-20
arctext, 3pt ........................................................................ 2-31
arctext, radius ................................................................... 2-25
block objects ..................................................................... 2-55
boxes ................................................................................. 2-42
circles ................................................................................ 2-45
ellipses, 3pt ....................................................................... 2-51
ellipses, radius ................................................................... 2-47
goto commands ................................................................ 2-58
input commands ............................................................... 2-62
lines ................................................................................... 2-37
lines, 2pt............................................................................ 2-40
machine commands .......................................................... 2-70
output commands ............................................................. 2-66
patterns ............................................................................. 2-73
pause commands .............................................................. 2-60
serial commands ............................................................... 2-67
text fields .......................................................................... 2-14
ellipses
3 pt .................................................................................... 2-51
radius ................................................................................ 2-47
enable
keyboard beep .................................................................. 3-16
keyboard/display .............................................................. 3-16
marker ................................................................................. 1-9
pin ..................................................................................... 3-43
encoded data .......................................................................... 2-6
encoding date/shift info ......................................................... 2-8
end speed ....................................................................... 2-71, 86
end speed ............................................................................... 3-5
English units .......................................................................... 3-42
enter
query text .......................................................................... 1-13
user text ............................................................................ 1-12
EOT control character ............................................................. 1-7
erasing
fields from patterns .......................................................... 2-74
pattern, block, font files .................................................... 2-88
error
checking .............................................................................. 2-8
messages ............................................................................. 4-1
Ethernet communications .................................................... 3-38
Ethernet port monitor .......................................................... 3-61
examples
extended protocol............................................................. 3-28
programmable protocol .................................................... 3-23
exercise test.......................................................................... 3-59
F
fault messages .........................................................................4-1
fields
available in patterns ..........................................................2-14
changing parameters .........................................................2-73
copying ..............................................................................2-73
deleting ..............................................................................2-74
global move .......................................................................2-76
moving ...............................................................................2-75
file size allocation ..................................................................3-17
firmware upgrade..................................................................3-53
flags .........................................................................................2-6
font
complex .............................................................................. A-2
considerations .....................................................................2-4
DIN ...................................................................................... A-3
PS-OCR ................................................................................ A-1
simplex ................................................................................ A-1
standard .............................................................................. A-1
function keys ...........................................................................1-4
G
global field move ...................................................................2-76
goto commands.....................................................................2-58
GS control character ................................................................ 1-7
H
halt print ................................................................................1-14
hexadecimal characters.......................................................... B-1
home marker ...........................................................................1-9
homing options .......................................................................3-4
host communications ............................................................3-19
hour codes ...............................................................................3-8
I
ignore character .............................................................. 3-21, 36
impact delay interval ...............................................................3-5
input commands ...................................................................2-62
input signal
options ...............................................................................3-17
tests ...................................................................................3-56
inserting time/date .................................................................2-8
instructions for operator .......................................................2-84
interactive jog..........................................................................2-3
interrupt print .......................................................................1-14
82350-
Index-5
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
IP address ........................................................................3-38, 39
machine (continued)
position verification ........................................................... 3-59
pre-position ....................................................................... 1-11
main menu .............................................................................. 1-4
maintenance tests ................................................................. 3-55
manage system parameters .................................................... 3-1
managing
block files ........................................................................... 2-88
custom fonts ...................................................................... 2-88
pattern files ....................................................................... 2-88
user fonts ........................................................................... 2-88
marker
home.................................................................................... 1-9
homing options .................................................................... 3-4
impact delay ........................................................................ 3-5
inoperative ........................................................................ 3-56
jog ...................................................................................... 1-15
keyboard control ................................................................. 1-5
online/offline ....................................................................... 1-9
parameters .......................................................................... 3-4
park .................................................................................... 1-10
pre-position ....................................................................... 1-11
pulse delay ........................................................................... 3-5
retract delay ........................................................................ 3-5
speed (diagonal) .......................................................... 2-71, 86
speed (diagonal) .................................................................. 3-5
speed (end) .................................................................. 2-71, 86
speed (end) .......................................................................... 3-5
speed (max.) ...................................................................... 2-71
speed (max.) ........................................................................ 3-4
speed parameter ............................................................... 2-71
speed parameter ................................................................. 3-4
stroke parameter ................................................................. 3-6
marking
area ...................................................................................... 2-2
patterns ............................................................................. 1-14
system overview .................................................................. 1-1
window ................................................................................ 2-2
mass field move .................................................................... 2-76
max. speed ............................................................................ 2-71
max. speed .............................................................................. 3-4
menu
arcs, 3pt ............................................................................. 2-23
arcs, radius ......................................................................... 2-20
arctext, 3pt ........................................................................ 2-31
arctext, radius .................................................................... 2-25
blocks ................................................................................. 2-55
boxes ................................................................................. 2-42
change mode, designer........................................................ 2-9
change mode, supervisor..................................................... 3-2
circles ................................................................................. 2-45
clock/calendar ................................................................... 3-41
date codes ........................................................................... 3-8
default text settings ........................................................... 2-82
ellipses, 3pt ........................................................................ 2-51
ellipses, radius ................................................................... 2-47
Ethernet communications ................................................. 3-38
extended protocol ............................................................. 3-27
J
jogging
interactive design ................................................................ 2-3
machine ............................................................................ 1-15
x/y-axes ............................................................................. 1-15
K
keyboard
control characters ............................................................... 1-7
diacritic symbols ................................................................. 1-7
edit keys .............................................................................. 1-6
enable/disable beep ......................................................... 3-16
enable/disable display ...................................................... 3-16
function keys ....................................................................... 1-4
marker operation ................................................................ 1-5
navigation keys ................................................................... 1-3
phonetic symbols ................................................................ 1-7
special keys ......................................................................... 1-7
L
labels, query text table ........................................................... 3-7
library
block files .......................................................................... 2-88
custom fonts ..................................................................... 2-88
patterns............................................................................. 2-88
user fonts .......................................................................... 2-88
license agreement ................................................................... viii
limiting access ........................................................................ 3-3
limiting file size ..................................................................... 3-17
limits of mark.......................................................................... 2-2
lines ...................................................................................... 2-37
lines, 2pt ............................................................................... 2-40
listing
pattern, block, font files .................................................... 2-88
load pattern on startup ........................................................ 3-15
load pattern ............................................................................ 1-8
location of object in window .................................................. 2-2
look-up table
date codes ........................................................................... 3-8
query text ............................................................................ 3-7
shift codes ......................................................................... 3-10
M
machine
commands ........................................................................ 2-70
home ................................................................................... 1-9
inoperative ........................................................................ 3-56
jog ..................................................................................... 1-15
movement tests ................................................................ 3-58
online/offline ...................................................................... 1-9
park ................................................................................... 1-10
Index-6
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
menu (continued)
goto commands ................................................................ 2-58
host communications ........................................................ 3-19
input commands ............................................................... 2-62
input signal tests ............................................................... 3-56
jog machine ....................................................................... 3-58
lines ................................................................................... 2-37
lines, 2pt............................................................................ 2-40
machine commands .......................................................... 2-70
main .................................................................................... 1-4
marker properties ............................................................... 3-4
omni serial number setup ................................................. 3-12
output commands ............................................................. 2-66
output signal tests............................................................. 3-55
passwords ........................................................................... 3-3
pattern park ...................................................................... 2-81
pattern serial number ....................................................... 2-78
pause commands .............................................................. 2-60
pin enable/disable............................................................. 3-43
programmable protocol .................................................... 3-20
pulse solenoids.................................................................. 3-57
query text setup .................................................................. 3-7
serial commands ............................................................... 2-67
serial1 (host) port setup .................................................... 3-19
serial2 port setup .............................................................. 3-35
shift codes ......................................................................... 3-10
solenoid tests .................................................................... 3-57
startup properties ............................................................. 3-15
text fields .......................................................................... 2-14
units of measure ............................................................... 3-42
message flags.......................................................................... 2-6
message format, extended protocol .................................... 3-28
message types, programmable protocol (all) ................ 3-21, 36
message types, extended protocol
1 – update/poll field .......................................................... 3-30
G – start print .................................................................... 3-30
O – place machine online .................................................. 3-31
P – load/poll pattern name ............................................... 3-31
Q – update query text buffer ............................................ 3-31
S – poll error status ........................................................... 3-32
V – update/poll user-text .................................................. 3-33
messages ................................................................................ 4-1
metric units........................................................................... 3-42
mode of operation
designer .............................................................................. 2-9
operator .............................................................................. 1-2
overview.............................................................................. 1-2
supervisor ........................................................................... 3-2
monitor communications ..................................................... 3-61
month codes ........................................................................... 3-8
move
all fields ............................................................................. 2-76
fields .................................................................................. 2-75
machine ............................................................................ 1-15
to first field ........................................................................ 1-11
to home field ....................................................................... 1-9
to park position ................................................................. 1-10
x/y-axes ............................................................................. 1-15
multiple controllers ................................................... 3-20, 27, 28
N
names reserved for patterns .................................................2-87
naming patterns ....................................................................2-13
navigation keys ........................................................................1-3
network communications......................................................3-38
networked controller ................................................ 3-20, 27, 28
new pattern ...........................................................................2-12
new pattern wizard ............................................................... 2-10
O
object anchor ..........................................................................2-2
objects in patterns.................................................................2-14
OCR
check flags ...........................................................................2-8
font ..................................................................................... A-1
omni serial number
overview ............................................................................3-12
reset options ......................................................................3-14
omni vs. pattern serial number ...............................................2-7
online at startup ....................................................................3-15
online signal options .............................................................3-17
online/offline...........................................................................1-9
open pattern at startup .........................................................3-15
open pattern ...........................................................................1-8
operation
marker keys .........................................................................1-5
modes ..................................................................................1-2
overview ..............................................................................1-1
operator-supplied data
data entry ..........................................................................1-12
setup parameters.................................................................2-7
order of print ...........................................................................2-5
output commands .................................................................2-66
output signal tests .................................................................3-55
overtemperature ...................................................................3-56
overview
controller operation.............................................................1-1
design considerations ..........................................................2-1
extended protocol .............................................................3-27
pattern design ......................................................................2-1
pattern objects ..................................................................2-14
pattern properties .............................................................2-78
remote pattern selection ...................................................2-87
P
parameters
arcs, 3pt .............................................................................2-23
arcs, radius .........................................................................2-20
arctext, 3pt ........................................................................2-31
arctext, radius ....................................................................2-25
backup ...............................................................................3-49
block objects ......................................................................2-55
boxes..................................................................................2-42
82350-
Index-7
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
parameters (continued)
circles ................................................................................ 2-45
ellipses, 3pt ....................................................................... 2-51
ellipses, radius................................................................... 2-47
extended protocol ............................................................ 3-27
field, changing ................................................................... 2-73
goto commands ................................................................ 2-58
input commands ............................................................... 2-62
lines ................................................................................... 2-37
lines, 2pt ........................................................................... 2-40
machine commands .......................................................... 2-70
output commands ............................................................. 2-66
pattern, changing .............................................................. 2-73
pause commands .............................................................. 2-60
programmable protocol ...............................................3-21, 36
restore .............................................................................. 3-51
serial commands ............................................................... 2-67
system default reset ......................................................... 3-44
text field ............................................................................ 2-14
parity
serial1 (host) port ............................................................. 3-19
serial2 port ........................................................................ 3-35
park
defining position ............................................................... 2-81
during pattern load ........................................................... 3-16
marker............................................................................... 1-10
parse flags .............................................................................. 2-6
password ................................................................................ 3-3
pattern vs. omni serial number .............................................. 2-7
pattern, block, font files
deleting ............................................................................. 2-88
patterns
abort print ......................................................................... 1-14
adding objects ................................................................... 2-14
adjust ................................................................................ 2-76
backup............................................................................... 3-49
changing parameters ........................................................ 2-73
copy .................................................................................. 2-13
create new ........................................................................ 2-12
data entry, setup ................................................................. 2-7
data entry, usage .............................................................. 1-12
default text ....................................................................... 2-82
design overview .................................................................. 2-1
editing ............................................................................... 2-73
inserting time/date ............................................................. 2-8
instructions ....................................................................... 2-84
library ................................................................................ 2-88
load on startup .................................................................. 3-15
load ..................................................................................... 1-8
max size ............................................................................ 3-17
name ................................................................................. 2-13
objects............................................................................... 2-14
open .................................................................................... 1-8
output commands ............................................................. 2-66
park on load ...................................................................... 3-16
park position ..................................................................... 2-81
print .................................................................................. 1-14
properties ......................................................................... 2-78
Index-8
patterns (continued)
remote selection ................................................................ 2-87
remote selection, debounce interval ................................. 3-17
remote selection, signal options ........................................ 3-17
reserved names ................................................................. 2-87
restore ............................................................................... 3-51
save .................................................................................... 2-13
sequence of printing ............................................................ 2-5
serial number ................................................................. 2-7, 78
signal states/names cross reference ................................. 2-87
size allocation .................................................................... 3-17
testing ................................................................................ 2-72
wizard ................................................................................ 2-10
pause commands .................................................................. 2-60
phonetic symbols .................................................................... 1-7
pin
enable/disable ................................................................... 3-43
impact delay ........................................................................ 3-5
pulse delay ........................................................................... 3-5
retract delay ........................................................................ 3-5
stroke parameter ................................................................. 3-6
test operation .................................................................... 3-57
port address .................................................................... 3-38, 39
position verification tests ...................................................... 3-59
positioning objects in window................................................. 2-2
power
on ......................................................................................... 1-2
precautions ................................................................................ x
prepare machine ..................................................................... 1-9
pre-position ........................................................................... 1-11
preventing access .................................................................... 3-3
print
abort .................................................................................. 1-14
cycle time........................................................................... 1-16
dryrun ................................................................................ 1-14
order .................................................................................... 2-5
order, changing .................................................................. 2-75
patterns ............................................................................. 1-14
sequence.............................................................................. 2-5
simulation .......................................................................... 1-14
processing order...................................................................... 2-5
programmable protocol
echo feature ................................................................ 3-22, 37
examples ............................................................................ 3-23
message types ............................................................. 3-21, 36
overview ............................................................................ 3-20
parameter settings ...................................................... 3-21, 36
protocol
extended ............................................................................ 3-27
programmable ................................................................... 3-20
PS-OCR
font ..................................................................................... A-1
pulse
delay interval ....................................................................... 3-5
solenoids ............................................................................ 3-57
82350-
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
Q
query text
data input .......................................................................... 1-12
setup parameters ................................................................ 3-7
settling time .................................................................... 2-85, 86
setup
remote pattern selection ...................................................2-87
shift codes
overview ..............................................................................2-8
usage ..................................................................................3-10
signals
input tests ..........................................................................3-56
output tests .......................................................................3-55
simplex font ............................................................................ A-1
simulate printing ...................................................................1-14
size allocation ........................................................................3-17
sizing characters ......................................................................2-4
software
startup .................................................................................1-2
upgrade ..............................................................................3-53
version ...............................................................................1-16
solenoid tests ........................................................................3-57
special keys..............................................................................1-7
speed (diagonal) .............................................................. 2-71, 86
speed (diagonal) ......................................................................3-5
speed (end) ..................................................................... 2-71, 86
speed (end) .............................................................................3-5
speed (max.) ..........................................................................2-71
speed (max.) ............................................................................3-4
speed, x/y-axes
pattern settings ........................................................... 2-85, 86
system settings ..................................................................2-71
system settings ....................................................................3-4
standoff parameter .................................................................3-6
start character ................................................................. 3-21, 36
startup options ......................................................................3-15
startup .....................................................................................1-2
station ID ................................................................... 3-20, 27, 28
stop bits setting
serial1 (host) port .............................................................. 3-19
serial2 port.........................................................................3-35
stop print ...............................................................................1-14
storing patterns .....................................................................2-13
stroke parameter ....................................................................3-6
subnet address ................................................................ 3-38, 39
supervisor mode......................................................................3-2
support ...................................................................................... ix
switch operating mode
designer ...............................................................................2-9
supervisor ............................................................................3-2
system
configuration .......................................................................3-1
inoperative.........................................................................3-56
maintenance ......................................................................3-55
messages .............................................................................4-1
tests ...................................................................................3-55
system parameters
calendar settings ................................................................ 3-41
clock settings .....................................................................3-41
communications ................................................................ 3-19
R
real-time data ......................................................................... 2-6
relocating fields .................................................................... 2-75
remote address............................................................... 3-38, 39
remote pattern selection
debounce interval ............................................................. 3-17
overview............................................................................ 2-87
signal options .................................................................... 3-17
removing
fields from patterns .......................................................... 2-74
pattern instructions .......................................................... 2-84
pattern, block, font files .................................................... 2-88
reposition marker ................................................................. 1-15
reserved pattern names ....................................................... 2-87
reset
omni serial number ........................................................... 3-14
system parameters ........................................................... 3-44
response format, extended protocol .................................... 3-29
restore default settings ........................................................ 3-44
restore patterns & parameters ............................................. 3-51
restricting access .................................................................... 3-3
retract delay interval .............................................................. 3-5
RS control character ............................................................... 1-7
RS232
communications................................................................ 3-19
selection ...................................................................... 3-20, 27
RS485
communications................................................................ 3-19
selection ...................................................................... 3-20, 27
S
safety summary .......................................................................... x
saved
block files .......................................................................... 2-88
custom fonts ..................................................................... 2-88
patterns ............................................................................. 2-88
user fonts .......................................................................... 2-88
saving patterns ..................................................................... 2-13
SEL_6 signal options ............................................................. 3-17
sequence of priint ................................................................... 2-5
serial
commands......................................................................... 2-67
communication monitoring .............................................. 3-61
communication settings .................................................... 3-19
serial number
alpha prefix ....................................................................... 3-13
omni (system) ................................................................... 3-12
pattern .............................................................................. 2-78
pattern vs. omni .................................................................. 2-7
serial port monitor................................................................ 3-61
82350-
Index-9
TMC470 Controller – TeleScribe Operation
®
system parameters (continued)
date codes ........................................................................... 3-8
Ethernet ............................................................................ 3-38
marker................................................................................. 3-4
max file size ....................................................................... 3-17
omni serial number ........................................................... 3-12
overview ............................................................................. 3-1
pin enable/disable ............................................................ 3-43
query text ............................................................................ 3-7
reset to defaults ................................................................ 3-44
serial1 (host) port ............................................................. 3-19
serial1 port ........................................................................ 3-19
serial2 port ........................................................................ 3-35
shift codes ......................................................................... 3-10
startup properties ............................................................. 3-15
units of measure ............................................................... 3-42
units of measure ................................................................... 3-42
upgrade controller firmware ................................................. 3-53
USB
backup files and parameters ............................................. 3-49
devices ............................................................................... 3-45
directory operations .......................................................... 3-46
file operations .................................................................... 3-46
firmware download ........................................................... 3-53
restore files and parameters ............................................. 3-51
user fonts
library................................................................................. 2-88
user-supplied text
data entry .......................................................................... 1-12
setup parameters ................................................................ 2-7
T
V
TCP/IP communications........................................................ 3-38
Telesis
fonts .................................................................................... A-1
support................................................................................... ix
terminator character .......................................................3-21, 36
test
exercise ............................................................................. 3-59
input signals ...................................................................... 3-56
machine movement .......................................................... 3-58
output signals.................................................................... 3-55
patterns............................................................................. 2-72
pin operation .................................................................... 3-57
position verification .......................................................... 3-59
print pattern ..................................................................... 1-14
solenoids ........................................................................... 3-57
x-axis ................................................................................. 3-58
y-axis ................................................................................. 3-58
text
entry into patterns ............................................................ 1-12
operator-supplied ............................................................... 2-7
text fields .............................................................................. 2-14
time insertion ......................................................................... 2-8
time to print ......................................................................... 1-16
time to settle ...................................................................2-85, 86
titles, query text table ............................................................ 3-7
troubleshooting ...................................................................... 4-1
viewing
pattern, block, font files .................................................... 2-88
Index-10
U
W
warnings .................................................................................... xi
warranty .................................................................................. viii
window coordinates ................................................................ 2-2
window size ............................................................................. 2-2
wizard for new pattern.......................................................... 2-10
work shift codes .................................................................... 3-10
X
x-axis
speed, pattern setting ................................................. 2-85, 86
speed, system setting ........................................................ 2-71
speed, system setting .......................................................... 3-4
test ..................................................................................... 3-58
Y
y-axis
speed, pattern setting ................................................. 2-85, 86
speed, system setting ........................................................ 2-71
speed, system setting .......................................................... 3-4
test ..................................................................................... 3-58
year codes ............................................................................... 3-8
82350-